School of Out-Of-Body

8/13/2019 School of Out-Of-Body

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/school-of-out-of-body 1/224

1



I

School of Out-of-Body TravelA Practical Guidebook

Michael Raduga

www.obe4u.com

Translated by

Peter Orange

Buy hard copy of this e-book onwww.obe4u.com

This e-book is FREE, so feel free to distribute it!Send it to all your friends!

Post it on your sites and blogs!

For disability:

The Phase is your new life without any borders

Seminars in California !" and around the #orld$http://school.obe4u.com/

Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other

works of M.Raduga may be sent to [email protected]

2

http://www.obe4u.com/


http://school.obe4u.com/


http://school.obe4u.com/




Table of Contents:

Part 1..............................................................................................5

ntering the Phase !tate.................................................................5

"hapter 1 # $eneral %ackground..............................................5

"hapter 2 # &ndirect Techni'ues.............................................1(

"hapter ) # *irect Techni'ues................................................5+

"hapter + # %ecoming "onscious ,hile *reaming...............-

"hapter 5 # /on0autonomous Methods...................................(

Part &&............................................................................................1Managing the Out0of0%ody perience.......................................1

"hapter - 0 *eepening.............................................................1

"hapter ( 0 Maintaining........................................................12

"hapter 3 0 Primary skills......................................................11+

"hapter 0 Translocation and 4inding Obects.....................1)2

"hapter 1 0 6pplication.......................................................1+5

Part &&&........................................................................................1-5

6uiliary &nformation................................................................1-5

"hapter 11 # 7seful Tips.......................................................1-5

"hapter 12 # Practitioners8 periences...............................1(2

"hapter 1) 0 Putting a 4ace on the Phenomenon..................1(

"hapter 1+ # 4inal Test.........................................................2+

6ppendi....................................................................................21+

)



%uy hard copy of this e0book on www.obe4u.com

%O&'(O&)

This guidebook is the result of ten

years of etremely acti9e personal practiceand study of the out0of0body

phenomenon:the phase;< coupled with

ha9ing successfully taught it to thousands

of people. & know all of the obstacles and

problems that are usually run into when

getting to know this phenomenon< and

ha9e tried to protect future practitioners

from them in this book.This guidebook was not created for

those who prefer light< empty reading. &t is for those who would

like to learn something. &t contains no speculations or stories< only

dry< hard facts and techni'ues in combination with a completely

pragmatic approach and clear procedures for action. They ha9e all

been successfully 9erified by a 9ast number of practitioners that

often had no prior eperience. &n order to achie9e the same result<

it is only necessary to read through each section thoroughly and

complete the assignments.

The book is beneficial not only for beginners< but also for

those who already know what it feels like to ha9e an out0of0body

encounter and ha9e a certain amount of eperience< as this

guidebook is de9oted not only to entering the state< but also

e'ually dedicated to controlling it.

"ontrary to popular opinion< there is nothing difficultabout this phenomenon if one tries to attain it with regular and

right effort. On a9erage< results are reached in less than a week if

attempts are made e9ery day. More often than not< the techni'ues

work in literally a couple of attempts.

Michael Raduga

Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel January 11, 2!

+






Part *

'nterin+ the Phase State

Chapter * , General Back+round

Su"stantially #ore in-depth infor#ation on the

pheno#enon, the author and his school, as $ell as guidance for self-study and independent practice #ay "e found in the "oo%

&'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 212 Transfor#ation*) +t

also contains #any illustrative ea#ples fro# the authors o$n

personal eperience)

T' 'SS'!C' O% T' PAS' P'!O.'!O!

The term phase state :or simply phase; encompasses anumber of widely known dissociati9e phenomena< many of which

are referred to by 9arious terms< such as astral or out-of-"ody

eperience. This concept also includes the more pragmatic term

lucid drea#ing < but does not always eist in the sense and form

implied by that epression. =ence< the term phase has been

introduced to ease the study of phenomena that eist beyond

habitual # and often unfair 0 associations and stereotypes. The

term out-of-"ody eperience is accurate to the etent that it

describes the sensation felt by a person eperiencing the phase

phenomenon.

. phase has t$o pri#ary attri"utes/ 1)0 practitioners

possess full, conscious a$areness during the eperience, and 2)0

practitioners recognie a genuine separation fro# the physical

"ody)

!imultaneously< the degree to which practitioners percei9ethe phase en9ironment affects the le9el of sensory eperiences

therein< which often occur in a higher form than the sensory

eperiences of wakefulness. This concept is difficult to imagine

5






without firsthand eperience of the phase. 6nd so< it is not

without reason that this practice is considered to be a higher state

of self0hypnosis or meditation< and is often referred to under

different names as the highest possible human achie9ement in9arious religious and mystical mo9ements :yoga< %uddhism< etc.;.

&n essence< the phase is an uneplored state of mind whereone is unable to control and feel his physical body. &nstead< his

space perception is filled with realistic phantom eperiences.

Interesting Fact!

Sensations in the phase state can

"e so realistic that practitioners $ho

unintentionally enter phase often "elieve

they are still in the physical "ody, thatthe eperience is occurring in the

$a%ing state) These types of unintended

ecursions #ost often occur at night or

early in the #orning)

&t is belie9ed that up to one 'uarter of the human

population has encountered this phenomenon. =owe9er< if

9ariations and different degrees of intensity of the state are taken

into consideration< it may be safely assumed that e9eryone has

encountered the phase. !ince the phase is a rare subect of study<

-






many who inad9ertently enter it do not reali>e what has taken

place once they return to wakefulness. Many do not assign any

significance to the occurrence of a phase en9ironment that is not

fully formed because shallow phases don8t lea9e the same oltingimpression as deep states. lusi9e as the phase may seem< this is

an etremely common phenomenon< accessible to anyone willing

to consciously learn and apply the correct methods of achie9ing

and maintaining the phase.

(" '!T'& T' PAS'/

!uch a 'uestion can only arise from not fullyunderstanding the properties of the phenomenon and its nature.

,hen one suddenly understands at a certain moment that he is

ust as real as he normally is< and is standing somewhere that is

not in the physical world with his same hands and body< and can

touch e9erything around him and discern fine details< such much

emotion stirs up inside him that no 'uestions arise at all. This is

the #ost a#aing eperience that a person can attain

The initial phase encounter is always olting and

sometimes frightening. *epending on the indi9idual< fear

eperienced during initial encounters with the phase occurs in

about one0third of all cases. 9en 9eteran practitioners encounter

fear< which speaks to the profound nature of the phase state.

,ith time< as rapture ebbs and emotions wane< thoughts

turn from the fact of the phenomenon itself towards how to

somehow use it. 6nd here< a fantastically di9erse field of practicalapplication opens up before the practitioner. These applications #

which this book communicates # are not to be associated with the

many unpro9en and dubious methods often described in sundry

esoteric literature. The information presented herein is 9erifiable<

practical< and attainable.

,hate9er the nature of the phase 0 a state of mind< or

perhaps an eternal eperience 0 this is the sole opportunity to?

9isit any part of the world or uni9erse@ see people who are out0of0reach in real life< including relati9es< the deceased< celebrities<

and 9arious creatures@ communicate with the enormous resources

of the subconscious mind and obtain information from it@ reali>e

(






desires that are unattainable in real life@ model artistic

productions@ influence physiology< and more. These are not dull

eperiences. They are eminently personal and real.

T' 0I%'ST"0' O% A P&ACTITIO!'&

&t must be said that 9arious diets< eercises< rituals< and so

forth do not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper

practice of the phase. /aturally eistent psychological and

physiological comfort is of the utmost importance. Thus< methods

recommending o9ereating< under0eating< or tormenting oneself

with 9arious diets and strange eercises are useless and ultimatelydetrimental to a practitioner8s wellness and balance< in9ariably

producing a negati9e impact to the effecti9eness of techni'ues

taught in this guidebook. 6dditionally< no meaningful association

has been found between practice of the phase and what may be

construed as Abad habitsB. Regardless of a lifestyle8s null effect

on phase achie9ement< a healthy< acti9e lifestyle will always be

recommended to enoy a good 'uality of li9ing.

Interesting Fact!

+f one "elieves that it is necessary

to position one3s "ed $ith the head"oard

facing the 4orth$est or so#e other

direction in order to have #ore effective

out-of-"ody eperiences, then doing so

$ill invaria"ly have a positive effect onresults) 5o$ever, the issue at hand is not

the positioning of the "ody, "ut a "elief

that is a%in to an intention, $hich in turn

is enor#ously i#portant)

&t has been obser9ed that a regular and orderly lifestyle

increases the fre'uency of genuine< lasting phase eperiences.

!leeping normally and soundly is the most basic eample of alifestyle choice that produces direct< positi9e impact on results<

especially when a practitioner commits to a full nightCs rest

se9eral times a week.

3






A0GO&IT. %O& .AST'&I!G T' PAS'

6 no9ice practitioner must understand the procedure forlearning and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of

se9eral primary steps< each of which is a uni'ue science unto

itself.

1. The first and most important step addresses the

techni'ues used to enter the phase state. &t is not necessary to

master e9ery type of entrance techni'ue :direct< indirect<

dream consciousness;. Dearning and applying the easiesttechni'ues pro9ides the necessary prere'uisites to more

ad9anced methods. &f so desired< it is possible to try more

difficult entrance techni'ues in parallel with the mo9ing on to

the subse'uent steps for mastering the phase.

2. "ontrary to popular opinion< the need for

conscious techni'ues does not cease upon phase entrance. &t is

absolutely necessary to learn and apply methods for

deepening the phase to achie9e a consistently hyper0realistic

en9ironment. 4ailing to apply deepening techni'ues almost

guarantees that eperiences will be dull< uninteresting< and

subse'uent practice short0li9ed. Practitioners should

immediately learn and apply deepening techni'ues after

mastering any one entrance method.

). The third step in9ol9es mastering techni'ues for

maintaining the phase< as without them the a9erage personwould ha9e phase eperiences of much shorter duration than

is possible. ,hen in the phase< the 'uestion of how to lea9e it

almost ne9er occurs. On the contrary< one is normally thrust

from it in the course of se9eral seconds if one simply does

nothing.

+. 6fter learning all the necessary techni'ues for

mastering the phase state< it is time to learn and apply

methods of control< which encompass the ability totranslocate< find and interact with obects< influence

surroundings< and so forth.






5. Once the pre9iously noted steps ha9e been

accomplished< a practitioner may proceed to apply phase

eperiences to enhance e9eryday life. O9er the course of this

guidebook< we will eamine do>ens of these 9aluableapplications in great detail.

,ith basic skills mastered< remember that practicing the

phase is worthwhile and effecti9e only when the results are

consistent. &f a practitioner enters the phase only once a month<the eperience will be too emotional to allow the obser9ation of

important principles and methodologies. The phase should be

encountered at least once a week. ,orking toward a le9el higher

than a weekly phase entry is ambitious< e9en beneficial.

Realistically< two to four phase eperiences per week might be

considered the le9el of a grandmaster< but this is far from the

upward boundary.

6s a rule< no9ice practitioners achie9e the phase less oftenthan is desired. =owe9er< with regular attempts< success occurs

more and more fre'uently< which should help alle9iate any

frustration resulting from failed attempts.

T"P'S O% T'C!I12'S

There are three primary types of techni'ues that make it

possible to enter the phase? direct < indirect and drea#consciousness. These methods are performed while lying down or

reclining< eyes closed< the body in a state of total relaation.

1






Interesting Fact!

Often, people have an out-of-

"ody eperience $ithout prior

%no$ledge or "elief in the pheno#enon) +t 6ust happens, and a large "ody of

evidence has "een gathered to support

this fact) 7ven #ore interesting is that

spontaneous eperiences often occur

after a "rief study of #aterial a"out the

topic, li%e this guide"oo%)))

8irect techni9ues are perfor#ed $ithout any noticea"lelapse in consciousness) :hile practicing direct techni9ues, a

lapse into sleep for less than ; #inutes is not considered a "reach

of the techni9ue)

%y definition< direct techni'ues encompass the

performance of specific actions for a pre0defined inter9al of time.

!uccessfully applied< direct methods result in a phase entrance

without passing through any intermediary states. 4or E of the

population< these techni'ues are the most difficult because the

mind naturally eists in an ecessi9ely acti9e state. &t has been

clearly pro9en within the !chool8s student body that no9ice

practitioners do not benefit from beginning a training regimen

with direct techni'ues. This is because direct techni'ues re'uire a

thorough understanding and masterful application of indirect

techni'ues in order to be effecti9e. The incorrect notion that the

phase state is etremely difficult to enter is due to the fact that people are more often drawn to the more difficult direct

techni'ues. &t is always better to approach direct techni'ues only

after becoming epert in the use of indirect techni'ues.

+ndirect techni9ues are techni9ues that are put into

practice upon a$a%ening fro# sleep)

The effecti9eness of indirect techni'ues is not dependent

on the length of the prere'uisite sleep cycle. &ndirect techni'uescan be used while eiting a full night8s sleep< after a daytime

catnap< or following se9eral hours of deep sleep. The most

11






important thing is that there is a lapse of consciousness into sleep

before implementing the techni'ues.

&ndirect techni'ues are the easiest techni'ues to practice<

which is why many practitioners use them to enter the phase.!leep naturally pro9ides the mind with deep relaation< which is

often difficult to ac'uire by other methods. !ince sleep is re'uired

to perform indirect techni'ues< it is a con9enient< oft0occurring

means to conduct eperiments with the phase. /o9ice

practitioners benefit greatly from the use of indirect techni'ues<

and learn firsthand the possibility of phase entrance.

8rea# consciousness is ac9uired "y techni9ues that allo$entrance to the phase through $hat is co##only referred to as

lucid drea#ing)

&n this case< the phase begins when the awareness that a

dream is occurring happens within the dream itself. 6fter

becoming conscious while dreaming< se9eral types of actions can

be performed< including returning to the body and rolling out<

which will be described later. ,hen deepening techni'ues are

applied in the contet of a conscious dream< the sensory

perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal wakefulness.

Techni'ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually

categori>ed separately from methods used to perform out0of0body

tra9el@ in practice< howe9er< it is apparent that the characteristics

of dream consciousness and out0of0body tra9el are identical<

which places both phenomena directly in the phase. These

practices are difficult because< unlike other techni'ues< they donot in9ol9e specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 6

large measure of preparatory steps must be obser9ed that re'uire

time and effort without any guarantee of results. =owe9er< dream

consciousness techni'ues are not as difficult as direct techni'ues.

Moreo9er< the maority of practitioners< whether using indirect or

direct techni'ues< eperience spontaneous awareness while

dreaming without ha9ing to apply techni'ues aimed at dream

consciousness.

&n addition to the techni'ues described abo9e< there are

also non0autonomous means and tools? 9arious de9ices< programs<

12






eternal influences< and so forth< which can be used to enter the

phase. &t is necessary to mention that these are only useful to

practitioners who are able to enter the phase without

supplementary assistance.Farious chemical substances and herbal supplements ha9e

been recommended to assist phase entrance< though using them is

unlikely to do any good< and use of these has ne9er yielded the

effect that can be achie9ed through unadulterated practice. 6s

such< the use of a chemical crutch is regarded here as completely

unacceptable.

CO!T&AI!)ICATIO!S

act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous

# or e9en safe 0 does not eist@ there has ne9er been an

ehausti9e< controlled study to pro9e either supposition.

=owe9er< since the phase eists at the fringes of naturally0

occurring states of mind< it can hardly be assumed dangerous.

/otably< the phase is accompanied by rapid eye mo9ement

:RM;< which e9ery human eperiences for up to 2 hours each

night< and this begins to eplain the phase eperience as entirely

safe and natural.

6lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the

phase on the physical mind and body@ namely< the emotional

effects that can occur during the onset of the phase state.

Phase entry is a 9ery profound< incredible eperience that

may induce fear< which is in9oked by a natural instinct for self0 preser9ation. The phase can create stress. This is especially true

for no9ices and those poorly ac'uainted with the nature of the

phenomenon and techni'ues used to control it. ,ithout

knowledge and proper practice< a fear0induced reaction can

escalate into full0blown terror. 6fter all< while in the phase<

fantasy 'uickly becomes reality< and reticent fears can take on

hyper0realistic 'ualities. ,hen this occurs< it8s not the phase

en9ironment< but the fear that is treacherous. &t goes withoutsaying that fear is a toic influence< especially to sensiti9e souls<

the elderly< and people with physical ailments< like certain

cardio9ascular conditions. This does not mean that persons in

1)






these groups should abstain from practicing the phase. The

solution is to learn about and a9oid common stressors associated

with the practice< know the mechanics of controlling obects< and

understand the principles of making an emergency eit.$i9en the possibility of negati9e phase eperiences< it

could be ad9ised that practitioners limit the time in phase to

fifteen minutes< though it is 'uite eceptional to maintain the

phase for such duration. Proposed time limits are entirely

theoretical and moti9ated by the fact that natural RM does not

normally last longer than fifteen minutes< and< at the risk of side

effects due to the alteration of natural cycles< eperiments

directed at unnaturally prolonging RM are not recommended.

&'CO..'!)ATIO!S

%O& 2SI!G T' G2I)'BOO3

*uring classroom instruction at the !chool of Out0of0

%ody Tra9el< se9eral key factors are known to produce positi9e

and negati9e effects toward the likelihood of success during

indi9idual practice?

Positive 'ffect on Practice !e+ative 'ffect on Practice

6ttenti9e< thorough study of the

course material

=asty and inattenti9e study of

course materials.

"onsistent work with practical

elements.

&nconsistent application of

techni'ues.*iligent completion of technical

elements.

6pproimating the techni'ues

outside of recommended

guidelines.

6 relaed approach to the subect

matter.

6 hysterical approach to the

matter< AidGe fieB.

Heeping a ournal of all initial

attempts< followed by recording

successful phase entrances.

6 lack of personal analysis when

problems or a lack of success are

encountered.6dhering to the recommended

number of daily entrance

attempts.

cessi9e number of attempts per

day.

1+






Regular attempts and practice. !poradic practice regimen.

7nderstanding that the author

knows his field well

A& also know e9erything & need to

and will do as & wantI. This

attitude is good only for those whoha9e a great amount of real

practical eperience. Reading a lot

on the subect or simply ha9ing

knowledge of it is not eperience.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& *

1uestions

1. ,hich alternati9e states are included in the term

AphaseBJ

2. =ow does the phase differ from out0of0body tra9elJ

). &s the perception of reality different in waking life

than in the phase worldJ

+. *oes the phase ha9e applications to day0to0day lifeJ5. ,hat skills must be learned before proceeding to

practical use of the phaseJ

-. =ow many types of autonomous phase entrance

techni'ues are thereJ

(. ,hat is the difference between direct and indirect

techni'uesJ

3. ,hich techni'ues are easiest for the maority of

practitionersJ. &s it worth trusting 9arious de9ices and programs

that promise to be able to help one enter the phase

stateJ ,hy or why notJ

1. !hould one eat meat when practicing the phaseJ

Tasks

1. Try to remember if you ha9e eperienced phaseencounters in the past.

15






2. &f you ha9e encountered the phase< what type of

techni'ue gained entrance@ direct< indirect< or

conscious dreamingJ

). &f possible< ask some friends and ac'uaintancesabout the subect of out0of0body tra9el or conscious

dreaming. *o any of them remember a similar

eperienceJ ,hat was it likeJ

Su"stantially #ore in-depth infor#ation on the

pheno#enon, the author and his school, as $ell as guidance for

self-study and independent practice #ay "e found in the "oo%&'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 212 Transfor#ation*) +t

also contains #any illustrative ea#ples fro# the authors o$n

personal eperience)

1-






Chapter 5 , Indirect Techni6ues

T' CO!C'PT O% I!)I&'CT T'C!I12'S

$enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun with the

easiest< most accessible methods? indirect techni'ues< which are

conscious actions performed upon awakening from sleep. !ome

critics incorrectly assume that indirect techni'ues are not ideal<

and prefer to start with direct techni'ues. =owe9er< doing so

pro9ides no guarantee for success and results in a large amount of

wasted time and effort. Starting practice $ith indirect techni9ues

guarantees entrance into the phase)

6 specific uni9ersal techni'ue that suits e9ery practitioner

is a myth since indi9iduals differ widely in personality< psychology< and learning speed. =owe9er< there is a relati9ely

easy uni9ersal algorithm< or procedure< that accounts for the

characteristics of each person and allows for the most rational<

effecti9e way to attain the initial phase entrances. This algorithm

encompasses cyclic practicing of the indirect techni'ues co9ered

in this chapter. ,ithout eception< these techni'ues 0 despite their

9arying degrees of difficulty 0 are suitable for e9ery practitioner

who wishes to eperience the phase.Results can be epected immediately following the first

few attempts@ howe9er< to achie9e measurable results< an a9erage

of fi9e daily< conscious attempts must be made. Making more

than fi9e attempts o9er the course of a day is fine< too. There is

nothing difficult to understand about performing the techni'ues

since they are clearly laid out and based on real internal

processes. Re#ar%a"ly, due to correctly practiced indirect

techni9ues, #ore than half of students at the live school attain phase entrance after only t$o days)

1(






Interesting Fact!

Many eperienced practitioners

prefer to "ypass the effort associated

$ith direct techni9ues and hone their s%ills through the sole use of indirect

techni9ues)

&n order to ensure that one8s efforts are most fruitful and

producti9e< we are going to indi9idually eamine each step and

principle behind the actions in great detail. Det us start from a

description of the techni'ues themsel9es< which will actually

apply practically ust as much to direct techni'ues as to indirecttechni'ues@ as they only differ in character and length of

application.

There are plenty of techni'ues< so after practicing all of

the indirect techni'ues presented in this chapter< a practitioner

should be able to choose three or four of the most straightforward<

indi9idually effecti9e methods.

!eparation techni'ues will be eamined later. They are

completely different from usual techni'ues< which only bring one

into the phase< but do not necessarily themsel9es lead to

separation from the body. &t is often also necessary to know how

to stop percei9ing one8s physical body after employing these

techni'ues.

&t is necessary to understand when to employ these

techni'ues< and the importance of waking from sleep without

opening the eyes or mo9ing the body. 6ttempting to enter the phase immediately upon awakening must be learned and practiced

to mastery since it constitutes the main barrier to successful

practice.

6fter eamining the peripheral information surrounding

indirect techni'ues< the cycles of indirect techni'ues will be

eamined< including what there are< how they work< and how they

are best used. !uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of

performing these cycles. =owe9er< there are eceptions< and it isnot completely necessary to proceed with these cycles if oneCs

own mind somehow hints what eactly one should start from<

which we will also eamine separately.

13






P&I.A&" I!)I&'CT T'C!I12'S

4ota Bene The techni'ues described below are the simple

components of indirect techni'ue cycles. &mplementing each

techni'ue8s description is far from effecti9e. Of the list gi9en

below< it behoo9es the indi9idual practitioner to choose the most

comprehensible and interesting techni'ues< then acti9ely study

and apply the instructions for use.

OBS'&7I!G I.AG'S

Testin+ Individual 'ffectiveness

&mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless<

eyes closed. Obser9e the blank space behind the eyes for ) to 5

seconds and try to locate recogni>able pictures< images< or

symbols. &f nothing appears during this eercise< the techni'ue

should be substituted. &f something appears< continue to passi9ely

obser9e the images. Meanwhile< the images will becomeincreasingly realistic< literally en9eloping the practitioner. *o not

aggressi9ely eamine the details of the image< or it will 9anish or

change. The image should be eperienced as a panorama< taking

1






e9erything in. Obser9e the images as long as the 'uality and

realism increases. *oing so yields two possible results? the

practitioner becomes part of the surroundings< and has achie9ed

the phase< or the image becomes borderline or absolutely realistic<and separation from the physical body is possible.

Trainin+

To train the use of this techni'ue< lie down in the dark<

eyes closed< and obser9e the blackness for se9eral minutes<

identifying any specific images that may arise from simple spots

or floaters< and then gradually transition to whole pictures< scenes<

or scenarios. ,ith practice< this techni'ue is 9ery easy andstraightforward. 6 common mistake made during practice of this

techni'ue is when the practitioner aggressi9ely attempts to

conure images 9ersus passi9ely obser9ing what is naturally

presented.

PA!TO. (IGG0I!G 8.O7'.'!T9



eyes closed. Try to wiggle a part of the body for ) to 5 seconds<

but without using any muscles. &f nothing mo9es during the

attempt< try a different techni'ue. &f a sensation of wiggling

occurs< e9en in the slightest< continue to employ the techni'ue<

stri9ing to increase the range of mo9ement as much as possible.

This techni'ue should be performed 9ery aggressi9ely< not passi9ely. 6s soon as the range of mo9ement nears or eceeds

four inches 0 which may take ust se9eral seconds 0 the following

situations may arise? one momentarily finds oneself somehow in

the phase< or the wiggled part of the body begins to mo9e freely.

The occurrence of mo9ement during practice of this techni'ue

allows the practitioner to transition to a separation techni'ue and

attempt to lea9e the body.

,hile practicing phantom wiggling< strong 9ibrations mayoccur< amid which separation may be attempted. !ounds also

often arise< allowing the opportunity to practice listening in<

which can lead to phase entrance.

2






The phantom wiggling techni'ue is not meant to produce

an imagined mo9ement by a phantom body. The point of the

techni'ue is to attempt the mo9ement of a physical body part

without using muscular action. That is< the focus should rest uponan internal intention of mo9ement without physical action. ,hen

the sensation occurs< it differs little from its real counterpart and

is often accompanied by hea9iness and resistance. $enerally<

there is 9ery little range of mo9ement at first< but with

concentrated effort the range of mo9ement noticeably increases.

&t does not matter which part of the body is used to

eercise phantom mo9ement. &t may be the whole body or ust

one finger. /either is the speed of the mo9ement important.&ncreased range of percei9ed mo9ement is the aim of the

techni'ue.

Trainin+

To train the techni'ue of phantom wiggling< rela a hand

for se9eral minutes while lying down< eyes closed. Then<

aggressi9ely en9ision the following hand mo9ements< without

mo9ing any muscles< for two to three minutes each? rotating< up0

down< left0right< etending the fingers and drawing the fingers

together< clenching and unclenching a fist. /o sensations will

occur at first. $radually< the sensation of muscular action will

become so apparent that the percei9ed mo9ement will be

indistinguishable from real mo9ement. *uring the first training

attempts< practitioners are often tempted to open their eyes to see

if actual mo9ement is occurring # that8s how real the sensationfeels.

0IST'!I!G I!



eyes closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. *o this for ) to 5

seconds without mo9ing and without opening the eyes. &f nothinghappens during this period of time< switch to another techni'ue. &f

any sounds like bu>>ing< humming< ra9ing< hissing< whistling<

tinkling< or melodies occur< listen attenti9ely. ,ith results< the

21








the body is possible. *uring rotation< separation has been known

to spontaneously occur and the practitioner enters the phase.

Trainin+To practice rotation< imagine re9ol9ing around the head0

to0foot ais for se9eral minutes while lying down< eyes closed. &t

is not necessary to focus on the 9isual effects of rotation or

minute sensations in the body. The key factor is the 9estibular

sensation that arises from internal rotation. 6s a rule< many

practitioners eperience difficulty performing full rotation. One

person may be limited to degrees of mo9ement where another

eperiences 13 degrees. ,ith consistent< correct practice< full)- degree rotation will occur.

%O&C') %A00I!G AS0''P



eyes closed. Picture a swift< compulsory fall into sleep for 5 to 1

seconds< and then return to wakefulness< followed by an

aggressi9e attempt at separating from the physical body.

$enerally< after performing this techni'ue< the practitioner8s state

of mind 'uickly transitions between different states of brain.

!trong 9ibrations often occur when emerging from this Apseudo0

sleepB< where the likelihood of separation from the body is

increased< accompanied the opportunity to practice other

techni'ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this eercise.&n essence< forced falling asleep is a trick on the mind

designed to take ad9antage of the brain8s reflei9e responses to

actions that immediately induce semi0conscious states that allow

easy entrance into the phase. mploying it is especially effecti9e

upon an etremely alert awakening< or after a mo9ement is

unintentionally made upon awakening.

4orced sleep is 'uite simple. &t re'uires a cessation of

internal dialogue< shifting mental focus away from eternalstimuli< and a strong desire for a 'uick reentrance to the sleeping

state followed by renewed wakefulness after se9eral seconds. &n

order to understand how this is done< it is sufficient to recall how

2)






one had urgently made oneself fall asleep before< or how one had

fallen asleep after ha9ing been ehausted< or after a long period of

sleep depri9ation.

6 common mistake in practice occurs when people fallasleep after attempting the techni'ue< forgetting the necessary

desire to 'uickly return to consciousness.

S'CO!)A&" I!)I&'CT T'C!I12'S

ST&AI!I!G T' B&AI!



eyes closed. Make 2 to ) s'uee>es straining the brain. This is

known as straining the brain. &f nothing happens< try another

techni'ue. &f 9ibrations occur during this eercise< try to mo9e the

9ibrations around the body and amplify them by continuing to

strain the brain. The stronger the 9ibrations< the higher the

probability that a separation techni'ue may be applied.

!pontaneous separation may occur. ,hile straining the brain< a

practitioner may eperience the sounds necessary for transitioning

to a listening in techni'ue.

The 9ibrations that arise from straining the brain are 9ery

striking. &f there is any doubt as to whether the 9ibrations

happened< then most likely a practitioner did not eperience them.

The 9ibrations may be described as an intense< painless electrical

current mo9ing through or gripping the body. 6t times< thesensation of a total numbing of the body is eperienced.

Trainin+

To practice straining the brain< lie down< eyes closed< and

attempt to strain the brain. *o not think about the fact that

actually s'uee>ing the brain is impossible. The imagined straining

should be spasmodic< rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire

brain or specific parts of it. *uring the process< a sensation of pressure or e9en real strain arises in the brain. ,ith 5E of

practitioners< this strain usually occurs within the first few

minutes of eercise. This techni'ue should be committed to

2+






memory when training so that it may be instantly recalled and

practiced upon awakening from sleep.

Practitioners often make the mistake of unintentionally

straining their facial and neck muscles instead of straining theinterior of their heads. This error should be a9oided at all costs<

lest it become a habit that frustrates genuine practice.

ST&AI!I!G T' BO)" (ITO2T 2SI!G .2SC0'S


This techni'ue in9ol9es straining the whole body and

differs little from straining the brain. ,hen awakening fromsleep< make one to three attempts at straining the whole body<

refraining from actually fleing any physical muscle. &f nothing

happens< try another techni'ue. Fibrations may occur as a result<

and amplifying these by straining the body without using muscles

can induce a spontaneous separation from the body. ,hen the

9ibrations become strong enough< attempt a separation techni'ue.

!ounds often arise during the 9ibration which allow for listening

in and a subse'uent entrance to the phase.

Trainin+

To practice? while lying down< eyes closed< try to strain

the entire body without using physical muscles for se9eral

minutes. Tingling< internal pressure< and a strain on the brain

often occur during this eercise. Remember to a9oid straining any

real muscles. &f physical strain occurs< results may be forfeited inthe critical moment of fruition.

7IS2A0I:ATIO!


eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< conure an intense desire to

see and literally create a specific obect. The obect should be

en9isioned at rest< about four to eight inches from the practitioner.Dimit the 9isuali>ation to simple< familiar obects< like an apple<

flower< sphere< or hand. !ometimes it is useful to imagine an

obect floating ust abo9e the eyebrows instead of directly in

25






front. &f nothing appears during this period of time< a different

techni'ue should be used.

&f an obect appears< one should keep looking hard at it<

and at a certain moment one will reali>e that one is alreadystanding net to it somewhere in the world of the phase. ,hen the

obect becomes realistic< one can also try to separate from one8s

body on one8s own.

S'!SO&"-.OTO& 7IS2A0I:ATIO!


eyes closed. &magine acti9e< physical mo9ement for 1 to 15seconds while touching an actual obect and simultaneously

eamining the imagined details of the room. &f nothing appears

during this period of time< a different techni'ue should be used. &f

real and imagined sensations become mied< then continue the

practice until the imagined sensations o9ercome the primary

senses.

I.AGI!') .O7'.'!T


eyes closed. 4or 5 to 1 seconds< concentrate on 9isuali>ing any

of the following actions? wiggling< walking< running<

somersaulting< pulling a rope< or swimming. Try to imagine the

mo9ement as a realistic and acti9e e9ent during the practice

period. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue should beemployed. &f results occur in the form of the sensation of

mobility< the imagined mo9ement should be continued until it

becomes the dominant sensation. ,hen the mo9ement achie9es

primacy< it is accompanied by translocation to the phase. &f such a

translocation does not automatically occur< a separation techni'ue

is recommended.

I.AGI!') S'!SATIO!S


eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< en9ision that a specific

2-






obect is being held in the hand. &f nothing happens< a different

techni'ue should be practiced. &f the impression of shape and

weight become apparent< concentrate harder on the sensation<

trying to compound the eperience. Once the obect8s presence inthe hand achie9es a realistic 'uality< separation is possible.

=owe9er< it is preferable to continue handling the obect. 6

practitioner is free to imagine any type of obect that fits in the

hand. amples include a telephone< a drinking glass< a remote

control< a ball< a pen< or a bo.

I.AGI!') SO2!)S

7pon awakening< without mo9ing or opening one8s eyes<

one should acti9ely try to hear a specific sound or word< e.g.

someone8s name or a melody. &f nothing happens< the techni'ue

should be changed for another one. &f sound arises< one should try

to listen in to it. ,hen it peaks in 9olume< one may try to

separate.

'"' .O7'.'!T


eyes closed. Perform two to fi9e sharp left0right or up0down eye

mo9ements. &f nothing happens< the techni'ue should be

echanged for another. &f 9ibrations occur< separation may be

attempted after efforts to intensify the 9ibrations.

)OT O! T' %O&''A)


eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< 9isuali>e a point in the

middle of the forehead. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue

should be used. &f 9ibrations occur< they may be intensified by

using this techni'ue or by straining the brain< facilitating

separation from the body. 6lso< sounds may arise that allow the practice of listening in.

%'A& .'TO)

2(







eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< imagine something horrific

and gra9eyard0related staying nearby< something graphic<macabre< out of the worst nightmare imaginable. &f nothing

happens< a different techni'ue should be employed. =owe9er<

acute fear may occur< most likely forcing the practitioner into the

phase where a separation techni'ue may be applied. 6lternati9ely<

9ibrations or noise may arise and allow the use of other indirect

techni'ues. 6 common problem with the use of this techni'ue is

that fear often makes the practitioner so uncomfortable in the

phase that he desires nothing else than to return to wakefulness.

&'CA00I!G T' PAS' STAT'


eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< recall the sensations that

accompanied a pre9ious phase eperience. :This only works if the

practitioner has achie9ed phase entrance in the past.; ither

nothing will happen and a different techni'ue should be used or

these sensations will be recalled and separating from the body

may be tried 0 if it doesn8t occur spontaneously. Fibrations or

noise may also arise during this techni'ue< in which case listening

in or straining the brain may be practiced.

B&'ATI!G CO!C'!T&ATIO!


eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< focus on breathing@ the rise

and fall of the rib cage< the inflation and deflation of the lungs<

the intake and escape of air. &f no results occur< a different

techni'ue should be used. &f 9ibrations< noise< or spontaneous

separation occur< the practice of this techni'ue should be

intensified and used to its full ad9antage.

S'0'CTI!G T' &IGT T'C!I12'S

23






The net step to mastering indirect techni'ues is choosing

the right techni'ues that suit indi9idual predispositions. There is

no point in going for one techni'ue or another only because they

look interesting and because someone wrote a lot or spoke a lotabout them. The choice should be based strictly upon what suits

an indi9idual practitioner.

Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni'ues<

practically only straining the brain works easily and 'uickly for

5E of practitioners. 6ll other techni'ues work immediately for

only about 25E to 5E of practitioners during initial training.

=owe9er< after se9eral training sessions< each techni'ue yields

results for (5E of engaged practitioners.One way or another< e9ery practitioner should identify a

certain set of techni'ues that works best. 6 set should consist of

no less than three techni'ues@ four or fi9e is e9en better to allow

more options and practical combinations. /on0working

techni'ues should not be discarded wholesale by the indi9idual

because they afford an opportunity to achie9e success through

new< pre9iously unresponsi9e eperiences.

To ensure the correct selection of techni'ues< each should

be separately practiced o9er a period of at least three days. To this

end< one should eperiment with each of the primary techni'ues

for 2 to 1 minutes before falling asleep< or e9en during the day.

&t is good to choose at least one secondary techni'ue practice.

This regimen allows a precise determination of the techni'ues

that will yield the best results for the practitioner. *uring the

process of selecting personali>ed techni'ues< a practitioner learnsand retains the techni'ues in an intimate< personal way< which

positi9ely affects how techni'ues are used during critical

moments.

&t is worth noting that the final selection of techni'ues

should be 9aried. 4or eample< choosing both straining the brain

and straining the body without using muscles is pointless because

they are practically one and the same. More often than not< they

will both either work or not work. This is why techni'ues shouldin9ol9e 9arious types of sensory perception? 9isual< audio<

kinesthetic< 9estibular< imaginary sense perception< and internal

strain. Remember that priorities and goals change with time< and

2






that a techni'ue that fell flat during initial attempts may

unepectedly pro9e 9aluable later on. %e fleible. /o set of

techni'ues should be car9ed in stone. &n fact< the set may change

se9eral times o9er the first few weeks as the practitioner disco9erswhat produces the best indi9idual results.

To close this section< a list has been pro9ided< detailing

the most effecti9e indirect techni'ues. This list was compiled with

classroom data from the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el and may

pro9e helpful in determining an effecti9e set of indirect

techni'ues.

The .ost 'ffective Indirect Techni6ues at School of Out-of-

Body Travel Seminars

Obser9ing &mages 15E

Phantom ,iggling 15E

Distening in 15E

Rotation 1E

!training the %rain 5E

!training the %ody ,ithout 7sing Muscles 5E4orced 4alling 6sleep 5E

Miture of Techni'ues 1E

Other Techni'ues 2E

S'PA&ATIO! T'C!I12'S

Det us begin with a totally shocking fact? during one0third

of successful indirect entries into the phase< it is not necessary to perform any specific phase entry techni'ues< as separation

techni'ues are immediately successfulK This has been

statistically pro9en at !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el seminars and

in the analyses of other sources. "on9ersely< an incorrect

understanding of separation techni'ues may lead to undesirable

conse'uences. &t is possible for a practitioner to enter the phase

state and be unable to separate from the body. Therefore< it is 9ery

important to understand how separation techni'ues work sincethey are often a key to success.

Interesting Fact!

)






Relatively often, a practitioner

$ill try to e#ploy separation techni9ues

to no effect, ho$ever, he $ill later

unepectedly understand that he had"een lying in a different position than he

sensed that he $as in, and in fact, it had

only "een necessary for hi# to stand up)

This happens #ostly a#ong "eginners

and is indicative of an incorrect

understanding of separation techni9ues)

6t times a practitioner may only need to think aboutseparation and it happens. This is a rarity< which eplains the

eistence of a whole series of auiliary techni'ues. The most

important separation techni'ues are rolling out< getting up<

climbing out< and le9itation.

&O00I!G O2T

,hile awakening< attempt to roll o9er to the edge of the

bed or the wall without using any muscles. *on8t worry about

falling out of bed< hitting the wall< or be concerned with the

details of how this techni'ue should feel. Lust roll.

G'TTI!G 2P

7pon awakening< attempt to get out of bed without physical eertion. This should be performed in a way that is most

comfortable for the practitioner.

C0I.BI!G O2T

,hile awakening< try to climb out of the body without

using any muscles. This techni'ue generally comes to mind when

a partial separation has been achie9ed through the use of othertechni'ues< or one part of the body has completely separated.

0'7ITATIO!

)1






7pon awakening< attempt to le9itate upward< parallel to

the bed. ,hile attempting to le9itate< do not wonder how it

should be accomplished@ e9eryone intuiti9ely knows how tole9itate from their eperiences in dreams.

%A00I!G O2T

Practically the same as le9itation? upon awakening< try to

sink down through the bed.

P200I!G O2T

=ere< upon awakening< try to eit the body through the

head< as if escaping from a lidded cocoon.

BAC3(A&)S &O00

6fter awakening< try to perform a backwards somersault

o9er the head without using any physical muscles.

B20G' T' '"'S$

7pon awakening< bulge out or widen the eyes without

opening them. 4rontal mo9ement toward separation may result.

!eparation techni'ues are united by a singular idea?nothing should be imagined< mo9ement should be attempted

without the use of physical muscles. The techni'ues produce the

same sensations of mo9ement felt in real life. &f nothing happens

immediately after trying< then the techni'ue is not going to work<

though it may deli9er results at a later time. 6 practitioner will

instantly be able to recogni>e if the techni'ue has worked.

=owe9er< people are often unprepared for the realness of the

sensations and think that they are making a physical mo9ementinstead of reali>ing that a part or all of the body has separated.

6fter this unfortunate failure< careful analysis helps to understand

what happened and plan for a successful retry.

)2






&f separation was incomplete or took place with some

difficulty< this is a signal that the techni'ue is being performed

correctly. !trength and aggressi9e effort are re'uired from this

point to achie9e complete separation. 4or eample< if somemo9ement began and then stopped after ha9ing made some

progress< then one should go back and mo9e e9en harder once

again in the same direction.

&n order to practice separation techni'ues< lie down with

the eyes closed and attempt all of them o9er the course of se9eral

minutes. !eparation has likely been accomplished if no muscles

twitch or strain and a sensation of mo9ement occurs. There will

be a strong< almost physically palpable internal effort to perform amo9ement. /aturally< no physical mo9ement actually occurs and

the practitioner remains prone and immobile@ howe9er< at the

right moment< these actions will lead to an easy entrance into the

phase.

Interesting Fact!

.pproi#ately 1< to =< of the

ti#e that the phase is practiced, one

realies i##ediately upon a$a%ening

that one has already separated) This

#eans that one #ay already go

so#e$here and stand, lie do$n, sit

do$n, etc) This is not ho$ever "eco#ing

conscious in a drea#, "ut an actually

a$a%ening)

T' B'ST TI.' TO P&ACTIC'

The key to practice is the 'uantity and 'uality of attempts

made that hone a practitioner8s skills. There are se9eral windows

of time best suited for employing indirect techni'ues.

To begin< it should be stated that sleep follows a cyclical

pattern. ,e awaken e9ery hour0and0a0half and then 'uickly fallasleep again< which gi9es rise to sleep cycles. 4urthermore< we

eperience two primary stages of sleep? rapid eye mo9ement

:RM; sleep< and non0rapid eye mo9ement :/RM; sleep.

))






/RM sleep includes many internal stages. The more we sleep<

the less the body needs deep /RM sleep< and the more time we

spend in RM sleep. Phase entrance is most likely to occur during

RM sleep.The best way to implement indirect techni'ues is by the

deferred #ethod . The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep

cycle during its final stage and then disrupt it again after falling

back to sleep< which makes sleep light during the rest of the sleep

cycle. !leep accompanied by fre'uent interruptions can be put to

producti9e uses.

4or eample< if a practitioner :let8s call him Lack; goes to

sleep at midnight< then Lack should set an alarm for - o8clock in

the morning. 7pon awakening< Lack should engage in some sort

of physical acti9ity< like going to the bathroom< getting a drink of

water< or reading a few pages of this book. 6fterward< Lackshould go back to bed thinking about how< within the net two to

four hours< he will wake up multiple times and make an attempt

to enter the phase during each awakening.

&f Lack goes to bed earlier< then his alarm clock should be

set back by that amount of time< since si hours of initial sleep is

the optimal length of time. &f Lack sleeps less than si hours< then

the second half of his night8s sleep will be too deep. &f Lack sleeps

longer than si hours< then there will be little time remaining forattempts< or Lack may not e9en be able to fall asleep.

&f a practitioner naturally wakes up in a forceful manner< it

will be difficult to regain sleep. Thus< it will not be necessary for

)+






the practitioner to get out of bed with the aid of an alarm. The

practitioner should attempt to go right back to sleep.

/aturally< the deferred method is most applicable in cases

where it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires<without ha9ing to wake up early. /ot e9eryone enoys such

luury on a daily basis< but nearly e9eryone has days off when

time may be set aside to practice the deferred method. +t is in

large #easure due to the deferred #ethod that classroo# courses

at the School of Out-of-Body Travel allo$ up to 2>= of class

participants to enter the phase in the course of a single $ee%end

The second most effecti9e window of time for entering the

phase is ordinary #orning a$a%ening) This generally occursduring light slumber following a full night8s sleep.

6nother effecti9e time to practice indirect techni'ues is

after awakening from a daytime nap. Once again< this type of

sleep will be light and short< which pro9ides the body needed rest

while allowing memory and intention to be kept intact through the

moment of awakening. 6gain< not e9eryone has the luury of

taking daytime naps< but if such a chance arises< then it would be

9ery beneficial to take ad9antage of the opportunity.

4ightti#e a$a%enings are the least effecti9e times for

phase eperimentation because the brain still re'uires a lot of

deep sleep at this time. 6wakening at night< the mind is 'uite

weak and hardly capable of any effort. 9en if some results are

obser9ed< awakening often ends with 'uickly falling back asleep.

This is not to say that normal practice of the phase cannot occur at

night@ it ust won8t be as effecti9e as at other times. The nighttimeoption is best for those who lack an opportunity to use other

windows of time for practicing the phase.

7nderstand that we awaken at night e9ery minutes<

which is why a minimum of four awakenings is almost

guaranteed when sleeping< e9en for ust si hours. ,hen the

practitioner knows about this and stri9es to sei>e those moments<

with time he will actually sei>e them and take ad9antage of them.

CO!SCIO2S A(A3'!I!G

)5






?onscious a$a%ening is waking up with a particular

thought in mind@ ideally< a thought about indirect techni'ues. &n

order to start using indirect techni'ues upon awakening< it is not

sufficient to ha9e a cursory knowledge of the techni'ues to beused when waking. *ue to the peculiarities of the human mind

and its habits< it is not always easy when waking to recall any

particular moti9e or idea. The goal of conscious awakening is to

practice instant action without being idle after waking up.

Interesting Fact!

There eists a "elief that the

pheno#enon of out-of-"ody travel is practically unattaina"le, and is

accessi"le only to an elect fe$ through

practices that re9uire secret %no$ledge)

5o$ever, the greatest difficulty $hen

trying to eperience out-of-"ody travel

in a short period of ti#e lies only in

i##ediately re#e#"ering a"out the

techni9ues upon a$a%ening $ithout

#oving) This is all si#ple and

straightfor$ard) But it is precisely this

trifle that is the largest stu#"ling "loc%

$hen trying to eperience such an

unco##on pheno#enon)

This is not difficult at all for approimately 25E of the population. =owe9er< for the other three0'uarters of the

population< this is an difficult barrier to entry that can e9en seem

insurmountable. &f such thoughts arise< one should simply

understand that this cannot be so< and that persistent attempts and

training are the key solution.

The reasons why people are unable to remember

practicing the phase upon awakening are? not being in the habit of

immediately doing anything upon awakening< a desire to sleeplonger< a desire to go to the bathroom< being thirsty< a desire to

suddenly start sol9ing day0to0day problems< and so on.

)-






"onscious awakening with the intent of attempting an

indirect techni'ue should be a practitioner8s primary goal< which

should be pursued at e9ery cost. The speed at which the phase is

learned and eperienced depends on this.There are se9eral effecti9e tricks to learning conscious

awakening?

+ntention upon falling asleep/ This is the 9ery important to

successfully achie9ing conscious awakening. 6 9ery clear

scientific fact has been pro9en by somnologists :scientists who

study sleep;? upon awakening< people usually think about what

they had been thinking about before falling asleep. This

phenomenon is easy to obser9e if the sleeper is eperience aserious life problem@ they fall asleep with the problem and wake

with it. !o< in a case like this< if difficulties at the front of the

mind are replaced with a desire to practice the phase< this will

produce the desired effect. &t is not necessary to think solely about

conscious awakening while falling asleep. &t is sufficient to

simply affirm the intention clearly and distinctly< e9en state the

intention out loud. Practicing these types of conscious actions

while entering sleep will do much to promote the success of

indirect techni'ues upon awakening.

@eneral intent/ The more clearly a practitioner

concentrates on the importance and necessity of waking up and

immediately remembering to practice the techni'ues< the more

solid the intent will become< and the more likely the process will

fulfill its role and actually lead to results.

.ffir#ing desires/ !ometimes an internal intention issimply not enough for some people< or they are unable to properly

affirm one by 9irtue of indi9idual characteristics. &n this case< an

affirmation of desires should be introduced at the physical le9el.

This could be in the form of a note with a description of a goal

placed net to the bed< under one8s pillow< or hung on the wall. &t

could be a con9ersation with friends or family about the particular

desire< or by repeatedly 9ocali>ing the actions that need to be

performed upon awakening. &t could e9en be an entry in a diary< blog< or teting on a mobile phone.

.nalying unsuccessful a$a%enings) 6naly>ing

unsuccessful attempts at conscious awakening is etremely

)(






important. ,hen remembering the failed attempt after se9eral

minutes< se9eral hours< or e9en later in the day< focus on it and

resol9e to succeed during the net attempt. *eep eploration of

the failure is highly effecti9e and practical since the practitioner islearning what works< what doesn8t work< and making healthy

resolutions toward success.

?reating #otivation/ The greater the desire to enter into

the phase to accomplish a goal there< the 'uicker successful

conscious awakening is achie9ed. Moti9ation is be created by a

great desire to do or eperience something in the phase. &n

general< pre9ious 9isits to the phase are great moti9ation< but an

uninitiated person does not know it and will need something towhich they can relate. 4or some< this could be a childhood dream

of flying to Mars< for others it could be the opportunity to see a

lo9ed one who has passed away< for another it could be the

chance to obtain specific information< or influence the course of a

physical illness< and so forth.

6side from natural methods to achie9e conscious

awaking< there are 9arious de9ices and tools that facilitate a

measure of success. These will be co9ered in "hapter 5 in the

section describing non0autonomous ways of entering the phase.

The "est #o#ent for conscious a$a%ening is $hile eiting

a drea#) This is the #ost effective and productive ti#e to atte#pt

separation or perfor#ing the techni9ues) 6t this moment<

physical awareness of the body is at a minimum. 6wareness at the

9ery end of a dream often occurs after nightmares< painful

eperiences in the dream< falling dreams # any dream that causesa sudden awakening.

,ith time< one should de9elop a refle that enables one to

perform planned actions at the moment of awakening< but when

consciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of

refle is highly beneficial to sei>ing the most fruitful of

opportunities to enter the phase.

*ue to 9arious psychological and physiological factors< it

is not possible for e9ery person to achie9e conscious awakeningafter e9ery sleep cycle. Thus< there is no point in becoming upset

if conscious awakening does not occur e9ery time. periencing

only 2 to ) awakenings per day is normal@ this is sufficient

)3






enough to attempt phase entrance 2 to 5 times per week when

practiced daily.

&t is not worth getting carried away with an ecessi9e

number of attempts. *uring the !chool8s courses< it has beennoted that doing 1 conscious awakenings or more :some students

try 2 or e9en ); o9er the course of one night and morning rarely

yields results. This is due to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal

that is desired so much that its reali>ation breaks the natural

rhythms of the body< one depri9es oneself of the intermediate<

transitional states that make the phase effecti9e. 6 practitioner

may also 'uickly become emotionally ehausted from the large

number of attempts and be unable to push limits in the rightdirection. The upside is that one will simply tire out. &f that starts

to happen< it is better to calm down and try to approach the matter

in a more relaed manner< e9enly and gradually.

A(A3'!I!G (ITO2T .O7I!G

6longside remembering the phase immediately upon

waking< another important re'uirement is awakening without

mo9ing< which is difficult since many people wake up and mo9e.

7pon awakening< scratching< stretching< opening the eyes< and

listening to real sounds should be a9oided. 6ny real mo9ement or

perception will 9ery 'uickly disintegrate the intermediate state

and introduce reality< the acti9ation of the mind and its

connection to the sensory organs.

6t first< awakening without mo9ing seems difficult ore9en impossible. =owe9er< it has been pro9en that this is

remedied for through acti9e attempts and the desire to achie9e set

goals. People often claim that they cannot awaken without

mo9ing< that it8s an impossible eperience. =owe9er< after se9eral

attempts< it will happen< and it will occur more and more

fre'uently with practice.

Thus< if there is difficulty in awakening without

mo9ement< do not despair< ust keep trying. !ooner or later< the body will yield to the practice< and e9erything will happen

smoothly.

)






6wakening without mo9ing is 9ery important because< for

the maority of people< eperiments with the phase are not

possible ecept in the first waking moments where waking

without mo9ing sets the stage for successful indirect techni'uecycles. Often< a practitioner will make 1 unsuccessful attempts

and mo9e while awakening. Once the practitioner learns to

consistently wake calmly and gradually< success 'uickly follows.o#ever if an a#akenin+ is conscious but #ith

movement that does not mean that the practitioner cannot

immediately make an attempt to fall into the phase; Such

attempts althou+h they #ill be about < times less effective

than usual should nevertheless be made Any opportunity to

practice #hile #akin+ should not be #asted; It must only be

kept in mind that one must first neutrali=e the effects of the

movement in order to once a+ain fall into an intermediate

state; In the case of movement it is e>tremely helpful to be+in

practice #ith forced fallin+ asleep; 0istenin+ in also #orks

#ell as does observin+ ima+es and phantom #i++lin+ each

performed passively for <-*< seconds instead of the standard

duration of ? to < seconds; After performin+ these cyclin+

may be+in;

6wakening without mo9ement< despite all its importance<

is not a goal in and of itself< and also not worth suffering o9er.

,hen awakening< if there is great discomfort< something itches< a

need to swallow arises< or any manner of natural refle< it is better

to deal with it and then act according to practices recommended

when mo9ement upon awakening happens. /ot all mo9ements upon awakening are real and< if only

for this reason alone< when mo9ement occurs< indirect techni'ues

should follow.

Interesting Fact!

'p to 2< of sensations and

actions that happen upon a$a%ening are

not real as they see#, "ut are phanto#)

4alse sensations occur in widely di9erse ways. People

often do not understand what is going on with them without

+






ha9ing eperienced the phase. 4or eample< a person may think

they are scratching their ear with their physical hand when they

are really using a phantom hand. 6 person may hear pseudo0

sounds in the room< on the street< or at the neighbor8s withoutnoting anything unusual. Or< a person may look around the room

without knowing that their eyes are actually closed. &f a

practitioner recogni>es such moments for what they are< they may

immediately try to separate from the body.

C"C0'S O% I!)I&'CT T'C!I12'S

+1






Thus far< indirect techni'ues used for phase entrance and

techni'ues for separation in the phase ha9e been co9ered.

"onscious awakening and the best times to practice it ha9e also been eamined. /ow< a specific algorithm of action for indirect

techni'ues will be presented. 4ollowing this algorithm promises

'uick and practical results.

*; Testin+ Separation Techni6ues #ithin < Seconds

Dike the pre9ious obser9ation of separation techni'ues< a

third of successful attempts with indirect techni'ues yield

immediate success upon the attempt of a separation techni'ue dueto the fact that the first seconds after waking up are the most

useful for entering the phase. The less time that has elapsed after

awakening< the better. "on9ersely< if one lies down epecting

something to happen< chances 'uickly dissipate.

Thus< upon awakening< preferably without first mo9ing< a

practitioner should immediately try 9arious separation techni'ues<

like rolling out< getting up< or le9itation. &f a techni'ue suddenly

started to yield results for approimately for 5 seconds< then

separation from the body should be attempted. !ometimes inertia<

difficulty< or a barrier will arise during a separation attempt. /o

attention should be gi9en to these problems. &nstead< resol9e to

separate 0 decidedly and aggressi9ely climb out of the body.

Heep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon

awakening is a skill of the utmost importance@ one that is worth

honing from the 9ery beginning< ne9er forgotten.

5; The Cycle of Indirect Techni6ues to 2se if One is

2nable to Separate

&f separation does not occur after se9eral seconds< it most

likely means that separation will not occur< regardless of elapsed

time in effort. This is where the practitioner must resort to other

techni'ues.

The practitioner should already ha9e chosen a minimumof three primary or secondary techni'ues that suit a practical

repertoire. =ere is where the techni'ues are put into action.

+2






4ota Bene +n order to give a specific ea#ple, $e $ill

ea#ine the use of three specific techni9ues, $hich should "e

replaced $ith a tested and chosen set of techni9ues) The

following operational techni'ues ha9e been used as eamples?obser9ing images :a;< phantom wiggling :b;< and listening in :c;.

6fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating< the

practitioner immediately starts obser9ing the 9oid behind the

eyes. &f images begin to appear within ) to 5 seconds< obser9ation

should continue without scrutini>ing the images in detail< or the

image will e9aporate. 6s a result of this action< the image will

'uickly become more and more realistic and colorful< engulfing

the practitioner. &f e9erything comes together correctly< a suddentranslocation into the picture will occur< or< when the picture

becomes 9ery realistic< attempt to separate from the body. &f

nothing happens after ) to 5 seconds< then the practitioner should

transition to the techni'ue of phantom wiggling.

4or ) to 5 seconds< the practitioner 'uickly searches the

entire body for a part that can be wiggled. Or< the entire period of

time is spent in an attempt to wiggle a specific body part? a finger<

hand< or leg. &f the desired effect occurs< then the practitioner

should continue with the techni'ue and achie9e the maimum

possible range of mo9ement. *uring this process< a number of

things can happen< including spontaneous separation< a successful

separation attempt< free mo9ement of the wiggled part< or the

presence of sound or 9ibrations. 6ll of these e9ents are of great

ad9antage. &f nothing wiggles o9er the course of ) to 5 seconds<

then the practitioner should mo9e on to listening in.The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. &f

the sound is there< listen and try to amplify it. 6s a result< the

noise may grow into a roar and spontaneous separation will occur<

separating through the use of a techni'ue will be possible< or

9ibrations will occur. &f no noise occurs o9er the course of ) to 5

seconds< then the entire cycle should be repeated.

&t is beneficial to eamine the reason behind the use of a

set of three indirect techni'ues. This is moti9ated by the fact thatthe body often reacts to techni'ues in 9ery peculiar ways. ,ith

one person< a techni'ue may work one day and not work on

another day< which is why if only one techni'ue is used< e9en a

+)






9ery good techni'ue that works often< a practitioner can miss out

on a lot of different eperience through the lack of 9ariety in

practice. Thus< a practical repertoire should consist of se9eral

techni'ues.

Interesting Fact!

So#eti#es, the first techni9ue

that $or%s for a practitioner never

results in a repeat of phase entrance

again, although other techni9ues that

$ere not i##ediately effective at the

novice stages of practice later "egin to$or% regularly and successfully)

?; &epeatin+ the Cycle of Indirect Techni6ues

&f the first cycle of ) techni'ues does not yield any clear

results< this does not mean that all is lost. 9en if the techni'ues

do not work< they still draw the practitioner closer to the phase

state and it is simply necessary to continue using the techni'ues

by again obser9ing pictures< phantom wiggling< and listening in #

and repeating this process at least three times.

=a9ing performed one cycle of techni'ues< one can easily

go on to doing a second cycle< a third one< a fourth one< and so

on. &t is 'uite probable that during one of these cycles< a techni'ue

will suddenly pro9e itself< e9en though it had not been working at

all ust a few seconds beforehand.6 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of +

cycles. The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically

difficult to do something that has shown itself not to work< and

one may gi9e up taking further action< e9en though one could be

at the cusp of falling into the phase. Heep trying< and then try

again< and again There ha9e been cases where it took twenty

cycles to produce results. 6 monumental effort< yes< but one

worth the outcome.

@; %allin+ Asleep #ith the Possibility of Tryin+ A+ain;

++






&f a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after

performing cycles and attempts to separate< or e9en if e9erything

worked out< it is still better to go back to sleep to facilitate

subse'uent attempts. 6gain< it is 9ery important to go to sleepwith a clearly defined intention of actually performing the cycles

upon awakening. !uch intention 9astly increases the probability

that the net attempt will occur soon. That is< one should not fall

asleep with an empty head and the desire to simply get a good

night8s sleep. &f using the deferred method< then clear intention is

mandatory< as se9eral attempts are possible o9er the course of a

sleep cycle.

9en if only a few attempts are made accompanied by

decided and concentrated effort< then the four steps described in

the algorithm will undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase.

&n order to more effecti9ely use the system of indirect

cycles< it is necessary to discuss what to do if one techni'ue

works and progress ceases during the cycle and phase entry does

not occur.

4irst< understand that if a techni'ue has begun to work<

only lack of eperience and skill will pre9ent the phase.

!econd< barriers are o9ercome by temporarily switching to

other techni'ues. Det us suppose that noise arising when listening

in grows louder and louder and then peaks in 9olume. &t would

surely be beneficial to switch to forced falling asleep or obser9ing

images for se9eral seconds< and then return to listening in. The

sound may then become much louder and pro9ide an opportunityto proceed with the techni'ue. !ometimes< it makes sense to break

off se9eral times into 9arious techni'ues and then return to the

primary techni'ue that yielded some results.

+5






&t is often possible to simultaneously perform two or e9en

three techni'ues and eperience no negati9e effect to results. &t is

also normal and natural to skip around from techni'ue to

techni'ue< de9iating from a specific plan of action. 4or eample<sounds often arise during phantom wiggling. &n this case< a

practitioner may ust simply switch o9er to listening in. Other oft0

encountered results pairings are? images from sound< sound from

rotation< sound from straining the brain< a strain on the brain from

listening in< 9ibrations from rotation< 9ibrations from phantom

wiggling< and so forth.

8uring initial atte#pts at using cycles of indirect

techni9ues, the pro"le# of confusion during a critical #o#ent

#ay arise, $hen a novice practitioner suddenly forgets eactly

$hat to do and ho$ to do it) This is nor#al, and the solution is to

i##ediately do $hatever co#es to #ind) Results can "e achieved

in this #anner) :hen a practitioner is #ore relaed a"out the

practice, such pro"le#s $ill no longer occur)

I!TS %&O. T' .I!)

Faried cycles of indirect techni'ues is an almost

mandatory precondition for getting the best result. There are some

+-






eceptions. !ometimes< through indirect indicators< a practitioner

may be inclined to begin with certain techni'ues< regardless of

what had been planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and

the ability to use such cues plays an etremely important role inthe use of indirect techni'ues because they enable a practitioner to

substantially increase the effecti9eness of practice.

int !o; *$ Ima+es

&f the practitioner becomes aware upon awakening that

some images< pictures< or remnants from dreams are before him<

then he should immediately proceed to the techni'ue of obser9ing

images< with all of the results that arise from it. &f this does notlead to anything< then cycling with a set of techni'ues should

begin.

int !o; 5$ !oises

&f the practitioner reali>es upon awakening that he hears

an internal noise< roaring< ringing< whistling< and so forth< then he

should immediately begin from the techni'ue of listening in. &f

this has no effect< then cycles of indirect techni'ues ought to

commence.

int !o; ?$ 7ibrations

&f a practitioner feels 9ibrations throughout the body while

awakening< they should be amplified through the use of straining

the brain or straining the body without using muscles. ,hen the

9ibrations reach their peak< the practitioner can try to separate. &fnothing happens after se9eral attempts< indirect techni'ue cycles

should start.

int !o; @$ !umbness

&f a practitioner wakes to numbness in a body part<

phantom wiggling of that part should be attempted. &f no result is

achie9ed after se9eral attempts< cycling should be tried. Of

course< it is better to refrain from techni'ues if the numbness is9ery intense and causes substantial discomfort.

AGG&'SSIO! A!) PASSI7IT"

+(






*uring the practice of indirect techni'ues< including

techni'ue cycles< unsuccessful attempts may result in falling

asleep or becoming completely awake. These results indicate adeficiency or ecess of aggression.

&f a practitioner usually falls asleep while attempting to

enter the phase< then more aggressi9e action is needed while

performing indirect techni'ues. &f< on the other hand< most

attempts end in a full and alert awakening< then aggression should

be curbed and techni'ues should be conducted more slowly and in

a more relaed manner. %alance between passi9ity and aggression

is imperati9e@ the phase state is easily attained by those practitioners who find a stable medium between passi9ity and

aggression.

The issue of aggression re'uires a closer eamination.

Auite often, atte#pts at indirect techni9ues are #ade leisurely,

$ithout desire or real effort, to &chec% the# off the list*) Results

#ore easily realied if the practitioner possesses an aggressive

desire to enter the phase) More often than not, practitioners lac%

aggressive desire, instead of having too #uch of it) Thus, each

effort re9uires a distinct $ant to succeed)

ST&AT'G" %O& ACTIO!

!ome mistakenly belie9e that indirect techni'ues will

produce 'uick< easy results< like a pill. *espite the fact that the

techni'ues described in this guidebook are the best means toentering the phase< strong effort still needs to be eerted. This is

not important for some< as e9erything comes 'uite easily to them<

but for others this is of great importance.

&ndirect techni'ues will definitely work if practiced

consistently and as described. &t has already been noted that in the

maority of cases< making se9eral concentrated attempts upon

awakening without mo9ement is sufficient enough to produce

results. &t may take a lot of time and effort to achie9e phaseentrance< so practitioners who set goals and work diligently will

be presented with a crown of success.

+3






6ttempts are important in large measure not only for the

final result< but also for the process itself. *uring practice< the

practitioner independently learns and sol9es issues that may not

ha9e been understood in the guidebook. Other times< the practitioner will encounter situations that ha9e ne9er been

described at all. &t8s impossible to prepare a student for e9ery

possible scenario< so as a practitioner mo9es deeper into practice<

a uni'ue< indi9idual perspecti9e and portfolio of eperiences

de9elops< which will certainly pro9e useful in the future. 7ntil

then< diligent practice of the information presented in this book

will ready a practitioner for that personal frontier.

6ctions in practice re'uire strict attention. !tudy thetechni'ues and selects those that work best. !et the goal of

consistent< conscious waking without mo9ement. Make an

obecti9e of performing cycles of indirect techni'ues while

waking up< day in and day out. :ith such a clear course of

action, the practitioner should never defocus his attention or

dissipate his energy on other related actions, li%e, for ea#ple,

on direct techni9ues for entering the phase) &f the indirect

techni'ues do not work in the course of se9eral days< continue

trying. The latest results occur in a matter of weeks< not months or

years< like some sources maintain. $oals are meant to be

stubbornly pursued< step0by0step< firmly< and diligently.

&f no results occur after 1 to 2 days< it is better to cease

practice for a week and take a rest< and then return with a fresh

resol9e to master the practice. &nterestingly enough< it is eactly

during such a break that spontaneous entrances into the phasethrough the most di9erse methods occur.

&f success is still elusi9e e9en after 1 to 2 months of trying<

then a thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to

root out any ob9ious mistakes or deficiencies. &f o9ercoming them

pro9es difficult or impossible< switching o9er to direct techni'ues

is not recommended since they pro9e much more difficult than

indirect techni'ues. &nstead< techni'ues for entering the phase

through conscious dreaming should be practiced.&t is also not worth skipping o9er problematic areas and

trying to make up for mistakes by epending e9en more effort.

4or eample< ignoring the precondition of awakening without

+






mo9ing will pro9e fruitless. %ypassing this re'uirement works for

9ery few people. 4acing e9ery problem head0on and working hard

to break through will be richly rewarded with an unforgettable<

treasured eperiences. Heep trying

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S

(IT I!)I&'CT T'C!I12'S

• &nternal certainty that nothing will happen instead of belie9ing

in positi9e results.

•!topping the performance of techni'ues after an unsuccessful

cycle when a minimum of four cycles should be practiced.

•"onstantly awakening to mo9ement instead of remaining still.

•Performing direct techni'ues in the e9ening. Total

concentration on indirect techni'ues is re'uired from the morning

on if a practitioner8s goal is access to the phase.

•Performing indirect techni'ues for an etremely long period

of time :2 minutes or more;. This is a complete waste of time in

most cases.•!witching from techni'ues that ha9e begun to work when

practice should be followed through to the end.

•Passi9ely performing techni'ues instead of being determined

and aggressi9e.

•Performing each techni'ue separately for too long a period of

time< e9en if the techni'ue does not work< instead of switching to

another techni'ue within se9eral seconds.•cessi9e thinking and analysis while performing indirect

techni'ues< which re'uire mental tran'uility and inner stillness.

•!topping and concentrating on unusual sensations when they

arise 9ersus continuing the techni'ue that brought them about in

the first place.

•tremely long anticipation upon awakening instead of

immediately performing techni'ues.

•Premature attempts at separating< instead of performing phase

creation techni'ues through to the end of progress.

5






•=olding the breath when unusual sensations appear. %e calm

instead.

•Opening the eyes when the only recommended mo9ement is

breathing or mo9ing the eyes behind closed lids.

•%eing agitated instead of relaed.

•"easing attempts to separate e9en when partial success is met.

•!training the physical muscles while performing the

techni'ues 9ersus remaining physically motionless.

• /ot practicing after an alert awakening< when techni'ues are

best applied 0 especially in the e9ent of waking without

mo9ement.•Merely imagining the techni'ues instead of really

understanding them and performing them< if< of course< one is not

performing rotation or other imagined techni'ues.

•!imply wiggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fied

determination to increase the range of mo9ement

•4alling right asleep during forced falling asleep< instead of

ha9ing the firm intention of continuing efforts within only 5 to 1seconds.

•!crutini>ing the details of images when using the techni'ue of

obser9ing images@ the whole image should be obser9ed

panoramically lest it disappear.

• &ntentionally trying to force pictures when obser9ing images<

instead of looking for what is naturally presented.

•!imply hearing noise when employing the techni'ue of

listening in< instead of attenti9ely trying to pay attention< catchsomething< and listen in.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& 5

1uestions

1. ,hy are indirect techni'ues the easiestJ

2. ,hy will one techni'ue work for some people and not for

othersJ

51






). =ow many attempts are necessary in order to enter the

phaseJ

+. ,hen obser9ing images< should a picture be conuredJ

5. =ow is phantom wiggling different from imaginedmo9ementJ

-. ,here does sound come from while listening inJ

(. =ow is forced listening in different from normal listening

inJ

3. ,hen employing the techni'ue of rotation< should one try

to rotate or simply imagine the rotationJ

. ,hat is physically strained when using the techni'ue of

straining the brainJ1. =ow is straining the brain different from straining the

body without using musclesJ

11. !hould a practitioner fall asleep when using the forced

falling asleep techni'ueJ

12. 6ccording to statistics from classes held at the !chool of

Out0of0%ody Tra9el< which indirect techni'ues are the most

effecti9eJ

1). ,hy should one practice all of the primary techni'ues in a

relaed stateJ

1+. ,hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one0third of the

time while using indirect techni'uesJ

15. &s le9itation the most popular separation techni'ueJ

1-. ,hat is the essential difference between indirect

techni'ues and separation techni'uesJ

1(. =ow does the separation techni'ue of rolling out differfrom the indirect techni'ue of rotationJ

13. &s it necessary to imagine anything while trying to

separateJ

1. ,hen is the best time to use indirect techni'uesJ

2. "an techni'ues that are traditionally used upon awakening

be attempted during the dayJ =ow effecti9e are these

techni'ues during the dayJ

21. &s becoming consciousness while dreaming the same asconscious awakeningJ

22. ,hen employing indirect techni'ues< does an inability to

awaken without mo9ing ha9e an effect on oneCs practiceJ

52






2). ,hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling

indirect techni'uesJ

2+. ,hat first step must be taken while cycling through

indirect techni'uesJ25. =ow many different techni'ues should a cycle consist ofJ

2-. ,hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be

practicedJ

2(. &f a lot of time has passed after awakening< is this good or

bad for cycles of indirect techni'uesJ

23. ,hat must be done if a techni'ue gets stuck at an

unsatisfactory le9el of resultsJ

2. &f the cycles do not work< what should be doneJ). ,hat are hints from the mindJ

)1. &n what cases is it necessary to introduce aggressi9e effort

when performing indirect techni'uesJ

Tasks

1. Try all of the primary indirect techni'ues while in a

relaed state and single out ) to 5 techni'ues that seem to

work. Repeat such training another couple of times on other

days.

2. Try all of the separation techni'ues in a relaed state.

). 6chie9e one conscious awakening followed by cycles of

indirect techni'ues.

+. 6chie9e one conscious awakening without any physical

mo9ement and attempt an indirect techni'ue.5. 7pon awakening without mo9ing< perform a full cycle of

indirect techni'ues< and repeat this eercise until phase

entrance is achie9ed.

5)






Chapter ? , )irect Techni6ues

T' CO!C'PT O% )I&'CT T'C!I12'S

8irect techni9ues for entering into an out-of-"ody

eperience are used $ithout the prere9uisite of sleep "y

perfor#ing specific actions $hile lying do$n $ith the eyes

closed) The ad9antage of direct techni'ues is that< in theory< they

can be performed at any moment. =owe9er< a large drawback

eists in the length of time it takes to master the techni'ues. Only

5E of practitioners achie9e success after making daily attempts

o9er a period of ) to - weeks. 4or some< an entire year may pass

before results are reali>ed. The difficulty in achie9ing results with

direct techni'ues is not a problem of inaccessibility< but the

natural psychological characteristics of the indi9idual. /ote9eryone is able to clearly understand the specific nuances

in9ol9ed< which is why some will continually make mistakes.

Many practitioners stri9e to master direct techni'ues right

away because they appear to be the most con9enient<

straightforward< and concrete techni'ues. =owe9er< it is a gra9e

mistake to begin attempting and mastering phase entrance from

this le9el. &n E of cases where no9ices begin their training with

direct techni'ues< failure is guaranteed. Moreo9er< a 9ast amountof time< effort< and emotion will be wasted. 6s a result< complete

disillusionment with the entire subect of phase eperiences is

possible.

8irect techni9ues should only "e practiced after #astery

of the easiest indirect techni9ues or ho$ to "eco#e conscious

$hen drea#ing) +n any case, difficulties $ill not $ear one do$n

after$ards, as it $ill "e eceedingly clear fro# ones o$n

eperience that the phase is not a fig#ent of the i#agination) .lso, an advanced %no$ledge of indirect techni9ues $ill #a%e it

considera"ly easier to achieve direct entry into the phase)

5+






Nuality of the phase eperience is not dependent upon the

chosen entrance techni'ue. *irect techni'ues do not necessarily

pro9ide a deeper< more lasting phase o9er indirect techni'ues.

*irect techni'ues are better suited for some practitionersand not others< but this ban only be said for a minority of the

practicing population. Meanwhile< indirect techni'ues are

accessible to absolutely e9eryone all of the time.

&f a practitioner has decides to begin practice with direct

techni'ues or has gained the necessary eperience with indirect

techni'ues< the underlying principles of the techni'ues must still

be learned. ,ithout these< nothing will occur< ecept

coincidentally and in rare cases. The key to the successful use ofdirect techni'ues rests in achie9ing a free0floating state of

consciousness. =owe9er< we will first eamine a large 9ariety of

9ery useful aspects and factors that make direct entry into the

phase much easier.

4irst< we will eamine when it is best to perform the

techni'ues and how intensi9ely to eercise their practice. Then<

we will eamine the 9ery important factor of body position< and

the no less crucial issue of how long the techni'ues should be

performed. Then< we will briefly in9estigate the issue of

relaation< and then we will immediately mo9e on to the actual

direct techni'ues. Only after co9ering all of the abo9e are we able

to del9e into the issue of what a free0floating state of

consciousness is and how to achie9e it.

T' B'ST TI.' TO P&ACTIC'

The issue of time is not important with indirect techni'ues

since the maor prere'uisite is that they are performed

immediately after awakening occurs. &n the case of direct

techni'ues< the issue of timing is much more critical.

/aturally< the best method for finding the right time to

perform direct techni'ues is the same as indirect techni'ues # the

deferred #ethod . =owe9er< there are some serious differenceshere. 4irst of all< one may interrupt one8s sleep at practically

anytime of the night or early morning. !econd< after ha9ing

55






woken up :5015 min.;< one should not fall back asleep< but should

immediately proceed to the techni'ues.

*irect techni'ues are many times more effecti9e with the

deferred method than at any other time. This is due to the fact thatwith the deferred method< the mind does not ha9e time to become

1E alert< and it is easy to fall into the altered state of

consciousness that will allow results.

,hen it comes to specific steps< one should awaken in the

middle of the night either on oneCs own or with the help of an

alarm clock. Then< one should get up and do something for ) to

1 minutes< and then lie down again in bed and perform the

techni'ues. &f it is probable that the practitioner will wake up intoo alert a state< and thus not e9en be sleepy< then the inter9al

between awakening and performing the direct techni'ue should

be shortened< and fewer things should be done during that period

of time. &t should be noted that with this setup< a free0floating

state of mind plays a far lesser role that with other procedures.

The second most effecti9e window of time is "efore

falling asleep at night < when the practitioner goes to bed. *uring

this period of time< the brain needs to shut down the body and

mind in order to renew its strength< which has been epended

o9er the course of the day. This natural process can be taken

ad9antage of by introducing certain adustments to it.

6ttempts at performing direct techni'ues during the day

are less effecti9e. =owe9er< if fatigue has already had a chance to

build up by this time< this can be taken ad9antage of because the

body will try to fall into sleep. This is especially suited for thosewho are accustomed to napping during the day.

$enerally< other windows of time produce a substantially

worse result< which is why one should start with performing

direct techni'ues in the middle of the night< or before a nightCs

sleep. Only after such techni'ues ha9e been mastered will it be

possible to eperiment with daytime attempts.

I!T'!SIT" O% ATT'.PTS

The degree of enthusiasm that is de9oted to any pursuit is

directly related to successfully reaching a goal. =owe9er< it is

5-






9ery important to know when to ease up< especially with the

delicate matter of phase entry. One attempt per day using a direct

techni'ue is sufficient. &f more attempts are made< the 'uality of

each attempt will suffer considerably.

Interesting Fact!

Many approach direct techni9ues

as if digging a ditch/ the #ore - the

faster and the "etter) The result/ doens

of atte#pts that yield no fruit)

6 lot of practitioners belie9e that do>ens of attempts o9erthe course of a day will yield the phase. This is not the path to

success and will 'uickly lead to disillusionment with the practice.

9en if after a week or a month no results are seen< direct

techni'ues should be attempted only once daily. Persistent<

analytical< and sensible< stubborn resol9e to practice properly will

produce the desired effect.

)2&ATIO! O% A! ATT'.PT

&t is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct

techni'ue by lying in bed and resol9ing neither to sleep nor get up

until the phase occurs. !uch coarseness in handling delicate

nature of the mind will produce nothing besides rapid emotional

ehaustion.

Rigid timeframes apply while performing directtechni'ues before a sleep or in the middle of the night. *irect

techni'ues attempts should only last 1 to 2 minutes. Donger

durations inhibit sleepiness because the mind will concentrate too

long on the techni'ues< and the desire to fall asleep will dissipate<

resulting in insomnia that often lasts se9eral hours. O9erdone

efforts negati9ely affect natural enthusiasm due lost sleep and

being tired the following day< which is compounded by the reality

of a growing number of failed attempts.&f direct techni'ues produce no effect o9er the course of

1 to 2 minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night< then it

is better to go to sleep with the thought that e9erything will work

5(






out another time. This is the positi9e outlook a practitioner ought

to always maintain.

BO)" POSITIO!

,ith indirect techni'ues body position isn8t important

since conscious awakening regardless of body position is the goal.

=owe9er< the position of the body is crucial while practicing

direct techni'ues.

There is not an eact body position that each practitioner

should assume since< once again< indi9idual characteristics and

instincts differ widely. There are specific rules that allow one toselect the right position< based on indirect indicators.

Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse

# lying on the back without a pillow< legs and arms straightened.

This notion has probably been borrowed from other practices

claiming that it helps achie9e an altered state of mind. =owe9er<

this position seriously impairs the efforts of the maority of

practitioners. The corpse pose should only be used when it is

probable that a practitioner will 'uickly fall asleep while

performing techni'ues in this pose< e9en though it generally

pre9ents sleep.

&f a practitioner eperiences difficulty falling asleep and is

constantly awake while performing direct techni'ues< then the

most comfortable position for the indi9idual should be used.

+f sleep co#es 9uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural

position should "e ta%en) +f a practitioner eperiences fe$er gapsin consciousness $hen the techni9ues are perfor#ed and has a

harder ti#e falling asleep, a #ore co#forta"le a position should

"e used) *epending on the situation< there are many possible

positions? lying down on the back< on the stomach< on the side< or

e9en in a half0reclined position. &t is possible that a practitioner

will ha9e to change positions from one attempt to another<

introducing adustments related to a free0floating state of mind.

&'0A4ATIO!

53








7A&IATIO!S O% 2SI!G

)I&'CT T'C!I12'S

Techni'ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase areeactly the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only

difference is in the method of implementation. The techni'ues are

described in detail in "hapter 2. =owe9er< since direct techni'ues

mostly re'uire passi9ity< not all techni'ues work e'ually well for

both direct and indirect entries into the phase. 4or eample< acti9e

techni'ues like straining the brain cannot be used to gain a

smooth entrance into the phase.

*irect techni'ues differ from indirect techni'ues in theirimplementation because of the slow< halting production of results

that occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end

of it. &f upon awakening something happens to work< then this can

practically always lead to entrance into the phase. 4or eample<

the same phantom wiggling before sleep can begin 'uickly

enough< but range of mo9ement will not be easy to increase< and

the entire implementation of the techni'ue will rely on protracted<

rhythmic mo9ement. Results take much longer? ten minutes

instead of ten seconds. These differences also apply to e9ery

techni'ue described in this guidebook.

Dike the practice of indirect techni'ues< to begin the

practice of direct techni'ues< a practitioner should choose ) or +

of the most suitable techni'ues from those that pro9e most

effecti9e to the indi9idual. &n order to assist the practitioner< a

table has been pro9ided< detailing the documented effecti9enessof the direct techni'ues?

-

The .ost 'ffective )irect Techni6ues at Seminars of the School

of Out-of-Body Travel

Phantom ,iggling 15E

Rotation 15E

Distening in 15E

Fibrations :occurring amid the use of othertechni'ues;

15E

Obser9ing &mages 1E

Miture of Techni'ues 1E

!imple separation :usually mied in with other

techni'ues;

1E

Other Techni'ues 1E






The primary difference in working with direct techni'ues

is the time that it takes to eercise each. &f testing a specific

indirect techni'ue takes only ) to 5 seconds< then in this case

se9eral minutes will be spent. *uration 9aries depending oncertain factors.

There are three primary ways of performing the

techni'ues? classical< se'uencing< and cycling 0 similar to the

cycling used with indirect techni'ues. To understand which

9ariant should be used< consider the following table?

7ariations of 2sin+ the

Techni6ues

(hen to 2se It

?lassical Cpassive0 variation/

One attempt of 1 techni'ue.

The techni'ue may be alternated

after each attempt.

0 when learning direct

techni'ues@

0 when a practitioner generally

sleeps poorly@

0 if attempts lead to waking up@

0 if attempts with other

9ariations occur without lapses inconsciousness@

0 if the body and consciousness

are in a relaed state@

Se9uencing C#iddle0/

One attempt with 2 to )

techni'ues for 1 to 5 minutes.

Techni'ues are alternated

infre'uently. 6ggressionfluctuates with the length of time

that the techni'ues are

performed.

0 used if falling asleep occurs

while using the classical 9ariation<

or if cycling results in becoming

wide awake@

0 when a practitioner generallyfalls asleep 'uickly@

?ycling Cactive0/

6lgorithm of cycling )

techni'ues like with indirect

entry to the phase< but

performing each techni'ue for 1seconds to 1 minute< and not ) to

5 seconds.

0 if the classical and se'uencing

9ariations put one asleep@

0 when one generally falls

asleep 9ery 'uickly@

0 can also be employed whenehausted or sleep depri9ed@

-1






6 practitioner should always begin with the classical

9ariation< i.e. using one techni'ue o9er an entire attempt. *ue to

the unusual nature of the efforts in9ol9ed< a beginner8s

enthusiasm may sustain a completely alert state. Dater< howe9er<strong< prolonged lapses of consciousness into sleep may occur.

=ere< it may be necessary to increase the le9el of acti9ity by

transitioning to the se'uencing 9ariation.

!e'uencing is the primary 9ariation used for direct

techni'ues because of its elasticity in application. &t can be

passi9e if o9er the course of 15 minutes when a practitioner

alternates two techni'ues for fi9e minutes. &t may also be

aggressi9e if used se'uencing three techni'ues for one minute.9erything between these two etremes allows proper practice of

the techni'ues and selection of the best 9ariation to achie9e a

free0floating state of mind.

&f falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs e9en with the

acti9e form of se'uencing< then one should start cycling through

indirect techni'ues< but performing each techni'ue from 1

seconds to 1 minute.

6s long work with the techni'ues is implied< one should

not torment oneself if one does not want to do something<

otherwise one may 'uickly tire out. 9erything should be a

pleasure to do and not cause any ecessi9e emotional tension.

T' %&''-%0OATI!G STAT' O% .I!)

There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entrytechni'ues offered in literature< stories< on the &nternet< and at

seminars. !ometimes< one description fundamentally differs from

another. &n the maority of cases< howe9er< common threads eist

that unite almost e9ery description of a particular techni'ue? short

lapses in consciousness< memory gaps< and drifting in and out of

sleep< all of which are hallmarks of the free0floating state of mind.

6fter any of these phenomena occur< all manner of unusual pre0

phase or phase sensations arise.Dapses in consciousness may last for seconds< se9eral

minutes< or more than an hour. They may range from a simple

loss of consciousness to entrance into a full0fledged dream. They

-2






may be singular and rare< or may occur se9eral times o9er the

course of a minute. ,hate9er a lapse entails< the mind attains a

mode of operating that is ideal for phase eperimentation<

pro9ided the practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and'uickly return to a conscious< waking state.

/ot e9ery lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The

lapse must ha9e sufficient depth to be effecti9e. Thus< with e9ery

unsuccessful lapse< another deeper lapse should be incurred.

The primary practical drawback of the free0floating state

of mind is the possibility of falling completely asleep during

lapses instead of only temporarily dipping into sleep. Techni'ues

are definitely necessary to ensure the desired result. !uchtechni'ues more or less fulfill an auiliary function< and thus one

need not be strict about them.Interestin+ %act

+t does not #atter $hich direct

techni9ue is used as long as it leads to

lapses in consciousness, success is

possi"le)

,hen performing the 9ariations of the techni'ues< a

practitioner can begin to 9acillate between full alertness and

complete asleep< coming to< and then nodding off again.

-)






To a9oid falling asleep re'uires a strong desire to return to

wakefulness. This is accomplished by a strong resol9e on the part

of the practitioner< e9en if< while performing a direct techni'ue<

drifting in and out of sleep occurs. The practitioner must firmlyassert that at the moment consciousness tapers off< awakening

will immediately occur.

On the other hand< if lapses do not occur< and are replaced

by complete alertness< the following tricks of the trade may help?

full concentration on mental actions or< con9ersely< musing and

daydreaming in parallel with the techni'ue being used. &t should

be noted that these are only effecti9e at the initial stages of

working with direct techni'ues since such techni'ues ha9e astrong sleep0inducing effect.

&f direct techni'ues do not lead to light sleep or singular

lapses after a long period of regular practice< then it must be

assumed that the practitioner is dealing with some appreciable

error in techni'ue or in the length of performance.

Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be

modified by body position during practice or by changing the

9ariation used while performing techni'ues.

ntering the phase with a free0floating state of mind most

often occurs as the result of three key factors. 4irst< one techni'ue

or another may begin to work well during a lapse. !econd<

nearness to the phase may unepectedly manifest itself through

sounds or 9ibration after a lapse. *uring this< transitioning to

techni'ues that correspond to the abo9e symptoms :listening in<

straining the brain; may be applied. Third< when eiting a lapse< itis sometimes easy to separate or 'uickly find a working techni'ue

by paying attention to initial indicators.

Dapses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 1E

of cases. =owe9er< stri9ing to achie9e lapses plays a 9ery

important role since they are not always percei9able< and a lapse

occurrence is not always ob9ious. They can be 9ery short in

duration or shallow. Or< they may not occur at all. /onetheless<

properly applied techni'ues to produce lapses may gi9e entranceto the phase.

A24I0IA&" %ACTO&S

-+






7sing direct techni'ues in the e9ening or in the middle of

the night take ad9antage of the body8s natural state of fatigue and

for practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. 4oreample< direct techni'ues more easily lead to success if the

practitioner is considerably sleep0depri9ed. Moreo9er< in such a

state< inducing a free0floating state of mind may be forgone. The

most important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately< in

addition to employing the appropriate 9ariations with the

techni'ues. ,illful depri9ation of sleep is torturous and useless

e9en though great results may be achie9ed by an eperienced and

knowledgeable practitioner in a se9erely fatigued state. %eginnersare better off approaching all forms of practice in a natural<

balanced way.

6n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of

sleep depri9ation@ physical and emotional fatigues also play

important roles. &n that case< the most important thing is not to fall

asleep when performing the techni'ues< and thus one must select

a more acti9e techni'ue 9ariation than usual.

ST&AT'G" %O& ACTIO!

*irect techni'ues seldom produce 'uick and clear results<

unlike entering the phase 9ia becoming conscious while dreaming

or through the use of indirect techni'ues. 6t first< direct

techni'ues produce sporadic results< which is why the path of

practice should not begin with direct techni'ues hoping for fastresults. &t is better to systematically practice a techni'ue< working

toward mastery on a consistent basis.

There is no cause for worry if results are achie9ed after a

month of daily attempts. 6 continual effort to analy>e practice

and impro9e should be the primary focus because failures are

always caused by distinguishable mistakes.

6lthough difficulties may arise with direct techni'ues< one

should ne9er abandon what worked until then :i.e. indirecttechni'ues;< as this could temporarily depri9e one of the

eperience that one has gained so far.

-5






6 combination of direct and indirect techni'ues should

ne9er be used during the course of a single day since this would

be detrimental to practical focus and enthusiasm. &t is better to

separately perform each type of techni'ue on different days. 4oreample< direct techni'ues could be used before falling asleep

during the workweek while indirect techni'ues may be practiced

during the weekends when a practitioner has more chances to

eperiment using the etra opportunities to sleep.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S

(IT )I&'CT T'C!I12'S

•6ssuming an incorrect position when lying down.

•Performing direct techni'ues during the day when a

practitioner is ineperienced< instead of in the e9ening or at night@

•Performing more than one attempt per day.

•Performing protracted relaation before the techni'ues< e9en

when this may play a negati9e role.

•Performing the techni'ues for too long when they should beeercised for no more than 2 minutes.

•4orgetting to affirm a strong intention of awakening during a

lapse of consciousness.

•Dack of a free0floating state of mind. This is mandatory

•4alling asleep during lapses in a free0floating state of mind<

instead of working toward multiple lapses while awakening.

•4orgetting separation techni'ues and awaiting some unknown

e9ent upon emergence from a lapse< instead of taking ad9antage

of the moment.

•cessi9ely alternating the techni'ues in a primary repertoire<

instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner.

•=olding the breath when unusual sensations are encountered.

6lways be calm.

•=alting practice when unusual sensations occur when it is

necessary to continue what brought about the sensations.

•cessi9e ecitement while performing direct techni'ues.

--






•Dack of aggression during attempts due to fatigue and sleep

depri9ation.

•Dack of a clear plan of action. 7nderstanding and planning the

use of distinct 9ariations of the techni'ues beforehand is crucial to

the analysis of subse'uent errors in practice.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& ?

1uestions

1. ,hich techni'ues should be mastered before proceedingto direct techni'uesJ

2. !hould results from the use of direct techni'ues be

epected after se9eral days or a weekJ

). &s it better to practice direct techni'ues during the day or

in the e9eningJ

+. &s it correct to perform three direct attempts per dayJ

5. ,hich body position should be assumed when suffering

from insomniaJ-. ,hich body position should be used by a person who falls

asleep 'uicklyJ

(. =ow much time should be spent on a single direct

attemptJ

3. ,hen can direct attempts be made for a longer period of

time than usualJ

. ,hat is the best way for an ineperienced practitioner to

relaJ1. "an direct techni'ues substitute relaation techni'uesJ

11. "an relaation techni'ues substitute direct techni'uesJ

12. =ow many 9ariations for performing direct techni'ues are

thereJ

1). &n what case is the 9ariation of se'uencing with direct

techni'ues employedJ

1+. ,hich techni'ue may not be used for direct entrance to

the phase with the goal of creating a free0floating state ofmindJ

15. ,hat happens to consciousness while in a free0floating

state during direct techni'uesJ

-(






1-. !hould awakening be attempted if falling asleep occurred

while using direct techni'uesJ

1(. ,hat is the probability of entering the phase without a

free0floating state of consciousnessJ13. ,hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni'ues

most often end inJ

1. &s seual acti9ity before an e9ening attempt using direct

techni'ue beneficialJ

Tasks

1. "hoose the best body position for direct techni'ues basedon your indi9idual preferences.

2. 7se the classical 9ariation of performing direct techni'ues

until it phase entrance< or falling asleep se9eral times.

). 7sing a combination of 9ariations for direct techni'ues<

achie9e a free0floating state of mind.

+. ,hen performing direct techni'ues< try to achie9e no less

than three lapses in consciousness before 2 minutes elapse<

or before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase

entrance is achie9ed.

-3






Chapter @ , Becomin+ Conscious (hile

)reamin+

T' CO!C'PT O% T'C!I12'S I!7O07I!G

B'CO.I!G CO!SCIO2S (I0' )&'A.I!G

The techni'ues for phase entrance 9ia becoming conscious

while dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self0

awareness during a dream< which< regardless of dream 'uality<

can be transitioned into a fully reali>ed phase eperience.

"ontrary to popular opinion< ha9ing an out0of0body eperience

through dreaming differs little from other techni'ues@ the primary

results of which may be persistently categori>ed as dissociati9e

eperiences? being fully conscious while remo9ed from the perception of a physical body.

The realism of a phase induced through becoming

conscious in a dream does not differ from phases entered using

other techni'ues< and< when deepened< the phase offers more

9i9id and lucid eperiences than those of e9eryday life.

&f a practitioner becomes aware of a dream while in it

:usually accompanied by a clear reali>ation that it is< Aust a

dreamB;< then the phase is eperienced from that momentforward.

%eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious

while dreaming with induced dreaming. 6n induced dream is the

dream of a specific topic< pro9oked on demand@ this does not

presuppose consciousness. Moreo9er< not all practitioners clearly

understand what it means to be fully conscious while dreaming.

"onsciousness while dreaming is always present to some etent<

but it is necessary to be as conscious as one would be in a wakefulstate. 6wareness is not possible as long as the plot of the dream

continues. ,hen full understanding occurs that e9erything around

is ust a dream< a person drops the dream and starts doing only

-






what he wants to do at that 9ery moment. 6nd after awakening<

he should not think that what happened was absurd or

uneplainable.

*uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream< a practitioner8s actions must be completely subordinated to the

desire to eperience a 'uality phase. This is why< upon becoming

conscious in a dream< proceeding to techni'ues related to

deepening and maintaining is crucial.

Techni'ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ 9ery

much in nature from other techni'ues< and there are good reasons

why these methods are differentiated from other practices< like so0

called astral pro6ection or out-of-"ody eperience COB70.=owe9er< their characteristics differ 9ery little in terms of results.

The techni'ue0related peculiarities rest in the fact that

specific actions are not re'uired to produce immediate< concrete

results. 6ll techni'ue0related elements are performed outside of

when consciousness while dreaming occurs. This is because it is

impossible to take some action if you are not conscious and do

not reali>e that you are dreaming. 6ll efforts are directed at

making that 9ery reali>ation somehow occur.

Interesting Fact!

7ven if a practitioner pays no

heed to the techni9ues for "eco#ing

conscious $hile drea#ing, "ut applies

direct or indirect techni9ues, on average

each fifth phase $ill still occur through"eco#ing conscious in a drea#) This

has "een statistically proven at se#inars

of the School of Out-of-Body Travel)

Many stri9e to achie9e consciousness during each dream

o9er the course of an entire night@ howe9er< this is rarely possible

due to physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep

and dreams are an important part of a human life. There is animportant need to switch off not only body< but also

consciousness< so that it may unconsciously sift and process the

9ast 9olume of information obtained in e9eryday life.

(






The timeframe for achie9ing conscious dreaming is 9ery

difficult to estimate due to the nature of re'uired actions. &ntensity

and intention definitely eert hea9y influence. 6 practitioner may

become conscious in a dream when first lapsing into sleep<regardless of when it occurs. Or< with regular attempts< this could

happen in two weeks to a month. /e9ertheless< these techni'ues

promise a much higher likelihood of success than direct methods<

and can be compared with indirect techni'ues 0 inferior to the

latter only in terms of the speed at which results are achie9ed and

the amount of effort re'uired. ,hile indirect techni'ues yield

maimum results in light of a full night8s rest< the amount of time

spent in bed is not a significant factor to achie9ing dreamconsciousness. Therefore< this techni'ue is sure to guarantee entry

into the phase< especially if difficulty has been encountered while

practicing other techni'ues.

Techni'ues used to attain dream consciousness should not

be combined with other types of techni'ues. &t is better to focus

on one thing at a time. +nterestingly, $hen a techni9ue is

practiced on a regular "asis, there is nearly a 1< guarantee

that drea# consciousness $ill spontaneously occur) .

practitioner #ust %no$ ho$ to react $hen this happens)

T'C!I12'S %O& B'CO.I!G

CO!SCIO2S I! A )&'A.

&t is possible to simultaneously practice se9eral techni'ues

for becoming conscious in a dream since e9ery techni'ue isdirectly compatible and complementary to another.

&ememberin+ )reams

There is a well known and widespread of fallacy that

supposes that dreams do not occur for some people. 9eryone

dreams< but not e9eryone remembers their dreams. 9en those

who acti9ely dream remember only a small fraction of these

nightly ecursions. =ence< one should not think that it isimpossible for someone who does not remember dreams to

become conscious in one. !uch a person should simply try to use

the techni'ues.

(1






6t the same time< there is a direct correlation between the

number of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming

conscious while dreaming. That is why de9eloping the ability to

remember dreams is crucial. &n essence< the ability to achie9edream consciousness rests with the conscious mind< which is 9ery

much interconnected with memory0related processes.

"onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams< but it lacks

rapid< operati9e memory. *reamers may know who they are< their

names< how to walk< and how to talk< but may not know how

surrounding e9ents are related< or the nature of their significance.

%y increasing the fre'uency of remembered dreams< short0

term dream memory becomes more de9eloped< which enablesmore realistic dream eperiences followed by a higher probability

of dream consciousness.

There are three techni'ues dedicated to increasing the

number of remembered dreams.

The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon

awakening. ,ithin the first few minutes of waking up< try to

remember as many dreams from the night before as possible. This

should be done with a great amount of attention and diligence

because this eercise strengthens the memory. &f possible< during

the day< or< better yet< before going to sleep at night< recalling the

pre9ious night8s dreams once again is highly beneficial.

,riting dreams down in a special dream ournal is much

more effecti9e than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning

while memories are still fresh. The more details recalled when

recording the dream< the better the ultimate results. This is a 9eryattenti9e approach that demands a higher awareness than simple

recollection. ,riting dreams in a ournal significantly increases

awareness of actions and aspirations.

6nother way of remembering dreams is to create a map of

the dream world. This is called drea# cartography and is similar

to keeping a ournal< though an enhanced le9el of awareness is

de9eloped by connecting dream episodes on a map.

4irst< record one dream< describing locations and e9ents<which are plotted on the map. This cartographic process is

repeated with each subse'uent dream< and after se9eral dreams an

episode will occur that is somehow related to the location of a

(2






dream that has already been recorded. The two dreams that took

place near each other are plotted net to each other on the map.

O9er time< more and more interrelated dreams will occur and the

map will become increasingly concentrated rather thandisconnected. 6s a result< the fre'uency and realistic 'uality of

remembered dreams will increase< and the dreamer will increase

the ability to achie9e consciousness while dreaming.

&t is best to set remembered dreams to memory after

temporary awakenings 9ersus waiting until morning. To

accomplish this< it helps to ha9e a pen and a piece of paper nearby

so that a practitioner may 'uickly ot down a phase or se9eral key

words from the plot of the dream before falling back asleep.7sing this information< the maority of dreams are 'uickly and

completely recalled.

The initial result from eercising these techni'ues is a

rapid increase in the number of remembered dreams. ,hen this

number becomes significant :anywhere between fi9e and 1 per

night;< dream consciousness follows on a regular basis.

Intention

&ntention is crucial to the success of any techni'ue. ,ith

regard to dream consciousness< its significance is multiplied. The

creation of intention is inetricably linked to the creation of

internal aspiration< which has re9erberations in both conscious

and unconscious states. &n reality< an ele9ated degree of intention

operates as a powerful method of mental programming.

This techni'ue is performed before falling asleep byaffirming a strong desire to become conscious while dreaming.

4or best results< alongside a strong< clearly defined intention<

think through what actions will be taken when dream

consciousness is achie9ed.

Creatin+ an Anchor

!ince dream consciousness is not linked to specific actions

that take place within a dream and sensory perception continuesto operate in the dream state< it is possible to de9elop and use an

artificially conditioned refle to achie9e consciousness. The

essence of this techni'ue is to train the consciousness to

()






uniformly react to certain stimuli that occur while being awake

and when dreaming< establishing a habit of specific response

e9ery time a certain situation occurs.

4or eample< while awake< a practitioner may ask< A6m &dreamingJB e9ery time they see an anchor . 6n anchor is any

obect that is often encountered while awake and while dreaming.

amples of anchors include a practitioner8s own hands< red

obects< or running water. ,hen first using this techni'ue< a

practitioner will be unable to 'uestion whether a dream is in

progress e9ery time a pre0established anchor is encountered.

=owe9er< with training and a strong desire this techni'ue 'uickly

produces results. O9er time< subconscious 'uestioning of the practitioner8s state becomes habit< happening while awake and

dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness.

&t is important to note that one needs not only to simply

ask this 'uestion< but that it is also important to answer it

mindfully< trying to isolate oneself from surrounding e9ents in

order to be able to answer it in an as obecti9e and

unpredetermined way as possible. 4ailing to answer obecti9ely

will always result in a negati9e response :no;< and dream

consciousness will not be achie9ed.

!atural Anchors

&n addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce

conscious dreaming< natural anchors should be gi9en focused

attention. These are obects and actions that regularly cause dream

consciousness< e9en when consciousness is not desired. %eingaware of the eistence of natural anchors actually doubles the

chances of their appearance.

The following eperiences are common natural anchors

that are present in dreams? death< sharp pain< intense fear< stress<

flying< electric shock< seual sensations< and dreaming about

phase entrance or the phase en9ironment. ,hen attempting dream

consciousness< identifying natural anchors produces results nearly

1E of the time.One may try to start flying each time that one answers the

'uestion. This is of course pointless when in waking reality.

(+






=owe9er< when dreaming< this will most likely lead to flight and

once again pro9e that e9erything around is ust a dream.

Self-Analysis"onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons

for an absence of conscious awareness? these analyses are

significant to attaining dream consciousness. O9er the course of a

lifetime< the mind grows accustomed to the paradoical nature of

dreams and pays less attention to them. This becomes apparent

while trying to understand that a red crocodile is unable to talk<

cannot be red< nor can it rent an apartment. ,hile dreaming< these

impossibilities are ne9er called into 'uestion. The essence of self0analysis is remembering dreams and thinking hard about why

their paradoical features had not been ade'uately recogni>ed in

the dream state.

,ith eperience< the e9eryday analysis of the

correspondence of dreams to reality begins to ha9e an effect on a

practitioner8s reasoning within the dream state. 4or eample< that

red crocodile8s presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts

that gi9e pause for reflection< which could in turn lead to the

understanding that e9erything happening is ust a dream.

ACTIO!S TO B' )O!' ('! B'CO.I!G

CO!SCIO2S (I0' )&'A.I!G

To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully

de9eloped phase eperience< one of three specific actions must betaken.

The best is the techni'ue is deepening< which should be

immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs.

*eepening must be performed within the dream episode before all

other techni'ues. *oing so 9irtually guarantees entrance to the

phase. The choice of actions that follow deepening is dependent

upon a practitioner8s predetermined course of plan in the phase.

,hen becoming conscious while dreaming< it is 'uitedangerous to try to return to one8s body in order to roll out of it

right away unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result

in a situation where< after ha9ing easily returned to one8s body<

(5






one would not be able to separate from it< as the phase becomes

significantly weaker when physical sensations coincide with the

position of a real body. &f one is to employ such an option< then in

order to return to one8s body one should simply think about it<which is often sufficient to make the transition occur almost

immediately.

6nother option is the use of translocation techni'ues to

arri9e at a desired place within the phase world. &t is also

dangerous to employ this 9ariation without first deepening@

translocating in a shallow phase makes a return to the wakeful

state 9ery likely. Translocation is often accompanied by a

substantial decrease in the depth of the phase state.

ST&AT'G" %O& ACTIO!

To achie9e dream consciousness< constant practice is

highly necessary because sporadic practice will fail to de9elop the

re'uisite background thought processes.

6s a rule< employing phase entry techni'ues within the

contet of dream consciousness produces results after se9eral

weeks< and the effects of the techni'ues are increasingly

pronounced with time. &f there are no results within a month or

two< refrain from these techni'ues for a period of time< take a

break for a week or two< and resol9e to assume a fresh start later.

Practitioners often stop using these techni'ues after initial

results as later effects become elusi9e and the fre'uency of dream

consciousness rapidly declines. These techni'ues should not beabandoned after first yielding results< though a gradual decrease

in practice is generally acceptable.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S ('! P&ACTICI!G

B'CO.I!G CO!SCIO2S (I0' )&'A.I!G

•Percei9ing the state of dream consciousness as a non0phase

state e9en though this phenomenon is one and the same with the phase.

(-






•6ttempting dream consciousness while performing other

phase entrance techni'ues when it is better to focus on dream

consciousness alone.

•,hen falling asleep< lacking sufficient desire to eperience

conscious dreaming e9en though this is critical.

•"ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream e9en after achie9ing

dream consciousness< whereas subse'uent actions must be

independent and based on free will.

• &ncorrectly answering the 'uestion A6m & dreamingJB while

dreaming.

•4orgetting to immediately begin deepening techni'ues whendream consciousness has been achie9ed.

•,hen eercising memory de9elopment< recalling the most

9i9id dreams instead of e9ery dream.

• &nconsistent concentration while practicing dream

consciousness techni'ues.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& @

1uestions

1. ,hat is the difference between an out0of0body eperience

and dream consciousnessJ

2. 6fter attaining dream consciousness< does the realistic

'uality of the surroundings differ from that of wakefulnessJ

). ,hich techni'ue can be used in a dream to becomeconscious in itJ

+. &s it possible to achie9e dream consciousness after the first

attemptJ

5. &s it true that not all people dreamJ

-. ,hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible

important for becoming conscious while dreamingJ

(. ,hat is dream cartographyJ

3. To eperience dream consciousness< what must be donewhile falling asleepJ

. "ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achie9e

dream consciousnessJ

((






1. ,hat eperiences in dreams often spontaneously gi9e rise

to a state of conscious awarenessJ

11. ,hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious

while dreamingJ

Tasks

1. 9ery day< immediately before going to sleep< culti9ate a

strong desire to become conscious in future dreams.

2. ,hen you wake up< recall or write down the episodes and

plots of your dreams e9ery day.

). Try to achie9e at least one instance of dreamconsciousness.

(3






Chapter < , !on-autonomous .ethods

T' 'SS'!C' O% !O!-A2TO!O.O2S

.'TO)S

%O& '!T'&I!G T' PAS'

4on-autono#ous #ethods of entering the phase are

various types of eternal influences that are a"le to help put a

practitioner into the phase state) "omputer programs< de9ices<

9arious physical actions< the aid of a helper< or e9en chemical

substances are eamples of non0autonomous methods. &n certain

cases< these methods actually help while some hinder the

possibility of a genuine phase eperience.

/e9er count on a magical substance or machine toautomatically eliminate the difficulties associated with phase

entrance. &f such a substance eisted< the whole topic of phase

eperimentation would eist at an ad9anced le9el of de9elopment

and pre9alence in society.

&n actuality< there are no de9ices or methods able to

consistently pro9ide access to the phase state. 6t best< these eist

in a largely supplementary capacity< and the more a practitioner is

able to do on his or her own< the more helpful and effecti9e thesesupplements are. &f phase entry has not been mastered

autonomously< then results through the use of supplements will be

totally accidental.

The reason behind the weak effecti9eness of non0

autonomous methods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the

physiological process responsible for the phase eperience cannot

be eactly defined. Only generalities are known< nothing else. &n

order to gain a clear understanding of the state< the processes thatgi9e rise to it must be discerned and analy>ed. 6ll eisting

technologies ha9e either blundered down a clearly mistaken path

(






:synchroni>ing the hemispheres of the brain;< or tra9elled toward

the detection and use of indirect indicators :cueing technologies;.

C2'I!G T'C!O0OGI'S

Of all non0autonomous assistance methods< cueing

technologies yield the best results. The operating principle behind

cueing technologies is 'uite simple? a de9ice detects rapid eye

mo9ement :RM; and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner<

prompting dream consciousness or an awakening that may be

followed by indirect techni'ues. "ueing programs or de9ices may

also send indicators o9er specific inter9als of time@ these arerecei9ed during RM sleep and are meant to cause a sleeping

practitioner to awaken and attempt indirect techni'ues.

More sophisticated RM0detecting technologies may be

purchased at speciali>ed stores or through online merchandisers.

RM0detecting technologies work by 9irtue of special night mask

e'uipped with a motion sensor that detects the fre'uency of

specific eye mo9ements that occur during RM sleep. ,hen the

eye mo9ements reach RM 'uality< the de9ice sends discreet

signals to the practitioner through light< sound< 9ibrations< or a

combination of these. &n turn< the practitioner must discern the

signal and react to it while sleeping with the goal of phase entry

through dream consciousness.

The effecti9eness of RM0detecting de9ices is more

plausible in theory than in practice. The mind 'uickly de9elops a

tolerance for these types of eternal stimuli and stops reacting<and< as a result< such technologies are hardly used more than one

or two nights per week. !econdly< a practitioner will detect only a

small portion of the signals< and conscious reaction occurs in e9en

smaller instances.

"ueing technologies are best used to send signals that

allow a practitioner to awaken without mo9ing during RM sleep<

which facilitates a high probability of phase entrance through

indirect techni'ues.Pricing of these Amind0machinesB :the common moniker

of any de9ice that purports to produce altered consciousness;

widely 9aries and is determined by 'uality of RM detection and

3






signaling. 69ailable models include? *ream!talker< *reamMaker

:/o9a*reamer;< RM0*reamer< 6stral "atapult< among many

others. !ince the use of these de9ices does not guarantee

increased success in practice< in9esting money in the technologyis not recommended. &f a practitioner is curious about cueing

technologies< similar de9ices may be constructed at home using a

special computer program and a run0of0the0mill optical mouse.

*esigns for a homegrown setup are easily located on the &nternet.

6nother do0it0yourself way of eperimenting with cueing

is through the use of a computer< a music player< or e9en the

alarm clock function on a mobile phone. The practitioner sa9es

short sounds or phrases< played as an alarm e9ery 15 to )minutes while sleeping. These sounds will signal the practitioner

to wake up and attempt indirect techni'ues.

&f the practitioner decides to use cueing technology<

se9eral fundamental principles should be considered as results

will be less likely if they are ignored. 4irst< mind0machines should

be used no more than twice a week. Otherwise< too high a

tolerance will be built up< rendering the machines ineffecti9e.

!econd< use cueing technology in combination with the deferred

method< which was co9ered in the section on indirect techni'ues.

&t is better to sleep for si hours without distraction and then< after

sleep has been interrupted< put on a sleep0mask or earpiece and

continue sleeping. !leep will be light for the remaining two to

four hours as there will be more RM sleep< making it easier for

the mind to detect cueing signals. 4inally< master indirect

techni'ues before making use of cueing technologies to attaindream consciousness and subse'uent phase entrance.

(O&3I!G I! PAI&S

,orking in pairs is considered the second most effecti9e

non0autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner

is to be the acti9e one< and the other fills the role of helper. The

acti9e one practitioner attempts to enter the phase while the helper pro9ides 9arious types of support to this end.

4or eample< the acti9e practitioner lies down in bed while

the helper stays nearby< waiting for the acti9e one to fall asleep.

31






,hen sleep occurs< the helper obser9es the eyes of the acti9e<

watching for the signs of RM sleep< which is mainly

characteri>ed by 'uick eye mo9ements. ,hen RM is apparent<

the helper whispers to the sleeper< communicating that e9erythingthe practitioner is eperiencing is a dream. The helper may 9ary

the 9olume of the whisper< use touch to strengthen the signal< or

shine a flashlight on the sleeper8s eyelids # which is 9ery

effecti9e.

The acti9e practitioner should detect the signals without

waking and indicate a state of conscious awareness by performing

'uick< cyclical eye mo9ements. &f no such indication is gi9en< the

helper continues to rouse the acti9e practitioner< who may finallywake.

&f the acti9e practitioner is unable to stay in the dream<

indirect techni'ues should be performed. The acti9e practitioner

should under no circumstances mo9e upon awakening or waste

9aluable seconds before transitioning to indirect attempts. &f

phase entrance does not occur after eercising the techni'ues< the

practitioner should again fall asleep with the intention of making

another attempt.

$enerally< se9eral such attempts are enough to glean

results. ,orking in pairs is best performed ust prior to a daytime

nap< or with the same deferred method used for indirect

techni'ues 0 an early0morning interruption of a practitioner8s

nighttime sleep.

T'C!O0OGI'S %O& I!)2CI!G T' PAS'

The ambition to create a de9ice facilitates 'uick and easy

phase entrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies

that claim to fulfill such a role. 6s already stated< none of these

de9ices has been pro9en effecti9e.

The most famous of these is the =emi0!ync system< which

purports to synchroni>e the two hemispheres of the brain. =emi0

!ync was de9eloped by Robert Monroe< an 6merican esotericismepert researcher. The idea behind =emi0!ync is that out0of0body

sensations may be induced by achie9ing synchroni>ation of the

brain8s two hemispheres. =owe9er< this type of approach yields a

32








based on theory. 6t present< consistent< focused< unassisted

practice is the simplest and only guaranteed means to achie9ing

phase entrance.

"P!OSIS A!) S2GG'STIO!

=ypnosis is a little0studied method of entering the phase.

The idea is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the

phase through suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that

hypnosis is an interesting concept< especially for persons who

easily yield to power of suggestion< but such indi9iduals account

for only 1E of the population.*ue to specific characteristics of human perception< the

chances are nil that hypnosis is a likely conduit to phase entrance.

!o< it seems unlikely that hypnotic techni'ues will become well0

known< or that a top0notch hypnotist would< through suggestion<

easily be able to lead a subect directly into the phase.

=owe9er< it is completely feasible that hypnotic

suggestion may promote higher fre'uency in dream

consciousness or awakening without mo9ing :and remembering

to do indirect techni'ues;. =ere again< this method is only a

facilitator< while actual phase entrance depends on the efforts of

the practitioner.

P"SIO0OGICA0 SIG!A0S

The simplest way to supplement the practice isestablishing a reminder that prompts conscious awakening and

subse'uent indirect techni'ues. This may be accomplished by

blindfolding the eyes or tying a cord taut around an arm or leg.

The idea is that the reminder is immediately felt when the

practitioner wakes< prompting the attempt of indirect techni'ues.

&n actuality< mind0machines work using the same principle since

these are most effecti9e as cues that arouse an intention to

perform a specific action.6 more sophisticated eample of a reminder is when a

practitioner do>es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a

certain body part. ,hile awakening< the practitioner will take the

3+






physical numbness a cue to practice indirect techni'ues. 6

secondary benefit to this method of physiological signaling is that

the numb body part may easily be used to perform phantom

wiggling. 4alling asleep while lying on the back with an arm behind the head< or by lying directly on an arm are effecti9e

eamples. These and other postures will impede circulation< cause

numbness< and promote awakening. /aturally< the numbness

should not be ecessi9e.

*i9erse eperiments that eploit physiological needs are

especially popular for inducing conscious awakening or becoming

conscious while dreaming. 4or eample< a practitioner may forgo

water o9er the course of the day before attempting to enter the phase. The effect is an acute thirst while dreaming< which may be

used to communicate that the dream state has taken o9er. Or<

thirst causes repeated awakenings< during which the practice of

indirect techni'ues may commence. 6n alternati9e to depri9ing

the body of water is including more salt in foods consumed before

going to sleep.

6nother method is to drink a lot of water before sleep<

causing the practitioner to awaken< naturally producing an

opportunity to perform indirect techni'ues. 7sing this has been

known to result in dream consciousness.

6nother popular method helps with direct techni'ues. &t

works by falling asleep while keeping the forearm propped up at

the elbow. ,hen the practitioner falls asleep< the forearm falls to

the bed as the body shuts down. 4eeling the arm fall signals a

lapse of consciousness< after which direct techni'ues may beattempted. &f this method fails to produce results on the first try< it

may be repeated by raising the forearm before falling asleep. This

method helps some< but rarely on the first try. &t should not be

counted as panacea.

Dike all other non0autonomous methods< practicing phase

entrance using physiological signals should not be done on a

regular basis. There are more pleasant< autonomous techni'ues

that only re'uire a natural willpower and healthy desire.

C'.ICA0 S2BSTA!C'S

35






!ince the beginning< the history of ad9ances in phase

entrance methodologies has included a direct link to the use of

consumable supplements< starting with plants and mushrooms in

ancient times. The use of speciali>ed herbs< mushrooms< and cactiis still practiced in isolated cultures@ !iberian shamans and /orth

6merican &ndians< for eample. 6mid the hunger for altered

states of awareness< these chemical supplements ha9e reached

e9ery corner of the de9eloped world. =owe9er< the proliferation

of these substances has caused a marked degradation in the

progress of modern phase practice.

The names and descriptions of these 9arious chemical

concoctions< herbs and plants included< are not worthy ofinclusion in this tet. They are officially considered illegal in

some countries while still a9ailable in the pharmacies of others@

ne9ertheless< they are all dangerous.

There are two primary problems with using such

supplements. 4irst< practicing the phase through the consumption

of chemical substances and 9arious herbal supplements is not a

path to de9elopment< but to ruin. *rug abuse and personal

de9elopment are polar opposites< in no way compatible. "heap

thrills are consistently followed by chemical dependencies and

health problems.

!econd< although a user may eperience phase sensations

under the influence of such substances< the 'uality of eperience

is completely different. &t is not only the stability or depth of

phase that are affected by these supplements< but a user8s

consciousness and awareness. The use of substances and theresultant alteration of mental processes negati9ely impact self0

awareness. The phase must be accompanied by two things? phase

sensations and a complete< conscious awareness. &f one of these is

missing< then the state eperienced< by definition< is not the phase.

,hen descriptions of these chemically AenhancedB eperiences

are studied< the hallmark of e9ery one is a complete lack of

control.

7sing any type of chemical or herbal substance to reachthe phase must be ruled out. !ummarily< these make it impossible

to eperience the phase and ultimately destroy physical and

mental health.

3-






T' %2T2&' O% !O!-A2TO!O.O2S

.'TO)S

%O& '!T'&I!G T' PAS'

9en though no beneficial non0autonomous technologies

currently eist< the future is wide open before them.

,ith the de9elopment of effecti9e technologies< the phase

will cease as the eclusi9e domain of the initiated and become a

widespread practice. Only then will the :sometimes ustified;

stereotypes and preudices connected to the mystical nature of the

phenomenon be dispelled< and only then will the phase gain thenecessary attention from researchers needed to ably de9elop the

science of phase practice.

,hen eternally applied methods that cause phase

entrance are disco9ered< the human eperience will drastically

change. These technologies for inducing and monitoring phase

eperiences will open up incredible possibilities. 4or eample< it

will be possible to participate in a mo9ie instead of ust watching@

people will be able to try and e9aluate products without lea9ing

home@ tra9el throughout designed worlds will take place@

computer games will be substituted with analogous eperiences

including real physical sensations.

The ultimate step would be the unification of phase

eperiences into a collecti9e< parallel world integrated to eistent

digital networks? the Matri :the Mindnet;. 7sing this Matri< it

will be possible to communicate with someone on the other sideof the planet 0 not ust through a broadband 9ideo link< but

literally tDte E tDte.

This 9ision of the future is a drop in the ocean of

possibilities that will open with phase entrance technologies. The

first step toward the future is a thorough< pragmatic< and correct

application of the techni'ues now a9ailable.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S(IT !O!-A2TO!O.O2S T'C!I12'S

3(






•The belief that de9ices are able to phase entrance if

autonomous techni'ues fail< e9en though it is much easier to enter

the phase through strictly indi9idual efforts.

•,asting a large amount of time and effort on 9arious

technologies to create a phase state. /o such technology eists.

•7sing cueing technologies on a daily basis< e9en though they

aren8t supposed to be used more than twice a week.

•7sing cueing technologies all night long< when it is much

better to use these in conunction with the deferred method.

•7sing cueing technologies without affirming a personal

intention of appropriate reaction to the signals? this is crucial tocue effecti9eness.

•,orking in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep<

e9en though RM sleep occurs infre'uently< and then for only

short periods of time.

•,hile working in pairs< the helper gi9ing an acti9e

practitioner too strong a signal. !ignals should be kept discreet to

pre9ent waking the sleeper.

•mploying an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre'uency of

dream consciousness.

•The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner who is not

susceptible to hypnosis.

•7sing physiological signals on a daily basis< causing physical

discomfort 9ersus getting enoyment out of the practice.

•The belief chemical substances promote dissociati9e

eperiences. 6cting on this belief is e'ui9alent to drug abuse.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& <

1uestions

1. 6re techni'ues based on breathing be considered non0

autonomous methods of entering the phaseJ

2. ,hich non0autonomous and non0chemical means allow

phase entrance after the first attemptsJ

33






). ,hy is it still not possible to create a de9ice that causes

phase entryJ

+. 6re cueing technologies beneficial to o9ercoming

difficulties with conscious awakeningJ5. ,hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies

for se9en days in a rowJ

-. "an cueing technologies make use of light signalsJ

(. "an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of

phase entryJ

3. ,ill putting a tight rubber band around an ankle promote

phase entryJ

. ,hile working in a pair< are both practitioners re'uired toenter the phaseJ

1. "an the helper be compared to a cueing de9ice while

working in a pairJ

11. ,hen should the helper gi9e the signal that the acti9e

practitioner is dreamingJ

12. ,ould a hypnotist making suggestions about entering the

phase be helpful to e9ery practitionerJ

1). ,hy do phase0inducing technologies sometimes work<

e9en though these are based on flawed theoriesJ

1+. ,hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical

substancesJ

Tasks

1. Try using a cueing de9ice se9eral times in conunctionwith the deferred method. "reate a short sound file and set it

to a de9ice that plays the file between 150minute inter9als of

silence.

2. %efore going to sleep at night< try the raised forearm

method of entering the phase se9eral times. 6ttempt this using

the deferred method.

). &f you ha9e the opportunity< try to achie9e entry into the

phase by working in pairs.

3













4ull spatial perception in the phase only occurs after

deepening techni'ues ha9e been applied. There would be no point

to remaining in the phase without deepening. 4or eample< what

is the point in finding a person in phase< if it is not e9en possible

to discern his or her eyes thereJ

+n a considera"le nu#"er of cases, deepening is not

necessary, since the phase eperience is co#pletely realistic, if

not hyper-realistic) +n cases li%e these, deepening #ay "e

"ypassed)*eepening is also related to the length of time a

practitioner may remain in the phase. &f an action is taken without

a deep< realistic phase< the eperience will always be se9eral

times shorter in duration than a phase where deepening

techni'ues had been applied. The properties of the phase space

9ery much depend on its depth. ,hen surroundings are blurry and

unclear< the stability of obects is 9ery weak.

There is a direct correlation between the realism of a phaseand a practitioner8s le9el of awareness< so it is etremely

important to ensure a deep phase in order to promote maimum

awareness. Interesting Fact!

The realis# of a deep phase

space is often so great that it causes

uncontrolla"le fear or shoc%

)

2






*eepening should only be performed following complete

separation from the body. &f initiated before separation< the phase

may end prematurely. &f complete separation does not occur<

primary deepening should be used. 6s regards the deepeningtechni'ues themsel9es< there is one main one and there are se9eral

subsidiary ones. The main techni'ue< which does not present any

difficulties< is sufficient for ha9ing a successful practice.

Interesting Fact!

+gnorance of deepening

techni9ues has led to a great nu#"er of

"aseless theories and superstitions)

So#e practices treat differing phase

depths as various states and even

$orlds) +n reality, there are si#ple

actions that ensure a singular phase

eperience)

P&I.A&" )''P'!I!G T'C!I12'S

The goal of primary deepening is to achie9e complete

separation from the body< allowing further actions within the

)






phase. Primary deepening entails achie9ing two principal

obecti9es? complete separation from the physical body and

anchoring the percei9ed body within the phase space.

,hen separation from the body occurs through the use ofa separation techni'ue< a posture must be assumed that

completely different from the posture of the real< physical body.

The greater the degree of postural similarity between the physical

and percei9ed bodies< the more shallow and brief the phase will

be. 4or eample< in the case of hori>ontal le9itation< a 13° turn

must immediately performed< arms and legs spread< adopting a

9ertical posture. 7nder no circumstances should a practitioner in

the phase remain in a posture identical to that of the physical

body.

&f a practitioner is pulled back toward the body after

separation< anchoring should be initiated that facilitates standing

or sitting in the phase. Resisting the gra9ity of the physical body

is paramount to remaining in the phase. The result of willful

resistance is directly proportional to the degree of applied effort.

&t will help to grab hold of surrounding obects and hold on tothem@ any means of anchoring the percei9ed body within the

phase are appropriate. &t is possible to start rotating around an

ais@ not simply imagining the rotation< but performing it with the

percei9ed body as well.

)''P'!I!G T&O2G S'!SO&"

A.P0I%ICATIO!

The more a phase is eperienced by the sensory faculties<

the deeper and longer the phase will be. !ensory amplification in

the phase is the most effecti9e deepening techni'ue precisely

because it allows the acti9ation of primary internal sensations

during the transition from reality to the phase. There are se9eral

ways to perform sensory amplification.

alpation is the first deepening techni'ue that should berecalled when entering the phase.

Fision may be absent at the beginning of a phase

eperience< but the sensation of occupying a defined space is

+






almost always present. &n the case of a completely absent sense of

sight< only tactile0kinesthetic perception is possible. That is<

mo9ement throughout a space and the touching obects there is

the only option when 9ision is absent. The sense of touch plays akey role in the perception of e9eryday reality. 6ccordingly< if the

sense of touch is acti9ely used in the phase space< it is only

natural that the phase will deepen and reach its maimum

potential.

Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything

that may be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be

done by 'uickly but carefully percei9ing the feel of surfaces and

shapes. =ands should not remain on a particular place for morethan one second< remaining constantly in motion to locate new

obects. The goal of palpation is to touch and also to learn

something about encountered obects or shapes. 4or eample< if

one feels a mug< one may touch it not only from the outside< but

also from the inside. Once a practitioner has rolled out of the

body< the bed may be touched@ the physical body lying in bed

may be touched< as well as the floor< the carpet< nearby walls< or a

bedside table.

6nother palpation techni'ue is performed by rubbing the

palms against each other as if trying to warm them on a cold day.

%lowing on the palms also produces sensations that will help

deepen the phase. !ince tactile perception of the world is not

limited to the palms< the hands should be mo9ed o9er the entire

body while in the phase to ecite and fully acti9ate the sense of

touch. 6s soon as palpation begins< the feeling that the phase is

deepening and becoming fied soon follows. 7sually< it takes fi9e

to 1 seconds of palpation eercises to reach the maimum le9el

of deepening. 6fter performing this techni'ue< the pseudo0

physical sensations will be indistinguishable from those of

e9eryday reality. &f 9ision is absent on phase entry< it 'uickly

emerges during palpation.

eering is the primary technical 9ariation of sensoryamplification. =owe9er< it is not always initially accessible since

it re'uires 9ision< which may begin as absent in the phase. Once

9ision appears or has been created using special techni'ues :see

5






"hapter 3;< peering may begin. The effecti9eness of this

techni'ue originates in the fact that 9ision is the human8s primary

instrument of perception. Therefore< by eciting 9ision to its

maimum potential within the phase< it is possible to attain a fullyimmersi9e phase state that is completely apart from normal

reality.

Peering should be done at a distance of four to si inches

from obects within the phase. 6 practitioner should glance o9er

the minute details of obects and surfaces to bring definition to the

phase space while increasing the 'uality of 9ision. ,hen looking

at hands< the lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles

should be eamined. &f obser9ing a wall< study the teture of itswallpaper. ,hen looking at a mug< one should look carefully at

its handle< the cur9e of its rim< or any inscriptions. 6ttention

should not remain on one area of an obect for more than half a

second. 6cti9e obser9ation should constantly mo9e to new

obects and their minute details< approaching obects or picking

them up to draw them nearer. &t8s best when obects near one

another@ otherwise< too much time is spent mo9ing around.

Peering brings 'uick and clear results. 7sually< if 9ision is

blurry and there is a yearning to return into the physical body<

with ust )01 seconds of peering all of this will be gone without a

trace. 6fter peering< 9ision adusts as 'uickly and clearly as if a

camera lens was correctly installed in front of the eyes< capturing

the image in the sharpest of focus.

Si#ultaneous peering and palpation pro9ide the

maimum possible deepening effect in the phase. This method ofsensory amplification engages the two most important percepti9e<

thus the effect is twice greater than when the two actions are

separately performed. &f 9ision is present in the phase<

simultaneous peering and palpation is an absolute necessity

because it facilitates good phase depth in the 'uickest and

simplest manner.

The combination of palpation and peering must not only

be performed simultaneously< but also upon the same obects. 4oreample< while a practitioner may look at the hands and

simultaneously rub them against each other@ or while looking at a

coffee mug< all of its parts may be obser9ed and touched at the

-






same. &t is necessary to maintain dynamism of action<

remembering that feelings should be eperienced not half0

heartedly< remembering that full concentration on sensory

amplification is an ecellent means to a deep< 'uality phase.

S'CO!)A&" )''P'!I!G T'C!I12'S

)ivin+ eadfirst

*i9ing headfirst is used if sensory amplification

techni'ues do not work< or when the practitioner in the phase is

located in an undefined space where there is nothing to touch or

look at. This techni'ue works thanks to the unusual 9estibularsensations that it causes< which help to enhance perception. This

techni'ue is performed with the eyes shut if 9ision is a9ailable

and the practitioner literally di9es headfirst into the floor or space

at the feet. 6 feeling of mo9ement away from the physical body

will immediately arise during the flight down< and the di9e itself

will be eperienced as if it is really happening. !imultaneously<

the surrounding space may darken and become colder. 6gitation

or fear may also appear. 6fter fi9e to 15 seconds of flight< the

practitioner is either arri9es in an undetermined place in the phase

or hits a dead end< like a wall. &n the case of a dead end< a

translocation techni'ue should be used. Translocation may also be

attempted if deepening does not occur during the flight< if sense

perception stops impro9ing< or if a good degree of realism has

already been achie9ed. 6n alternati9e to the translocation

techni'ue? hold the hands about four to si inches in front of theface and try to obser9e them without opening the eyes@ this will

mo9e the practitioner to another random location.

,hen falling headfirst< do not think about the floor@

assume that it will be penetrated. This 9ery effecti9e if the phase

has not reached a fullness of depth.

6 desire to not simply fall down obser9ing one8s

perceptions< but instead race swiftly downward while trying to

mo9e away from the body is etremely important. &n case offailure to do so< instead of deepening< such a fall may lead to a

return to the state of being awake< i.e. to a foul.

(






7ibration

Dike falling headfirst< the 9ibration techni'ue should be

used if sensory amplification techni'ues do not work< or when the

practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space wherethere is nothing to touch or look at.

6fter separating from the body< it is normally 'uite easy

to create 9ibrations by thinking about them< by straining the brain<

or by straining the body without using muscles. The occurrence of

9ibrations pro9ides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase.

6n ad9antage of this techni'ue is that it does not re'uire any

preliminary actions and thus may be practiced at any moment.

The brain is strained to the maimum etent possible<which cause 9ibrations that may be intensified and managed

through spasmodic or prolonged straining.

&f this techni'ue does not produce deepening after fi9e to

1 seconds< the techni'ue has to be changed or action should be

taken at the practitioner8s current depth in the phase.

A++ressive Action

This techni'ue may be used as an alternati9e to any other

deepening techni'ue since it can be used at any moment.

Practicing this techni'ue only re'uires aggressi9e action of the

percei9ed body. 6 practitioner may run< roll on the floor< perform

gymnastics< or mo9e the arms and legs. Maimum acti9ity and

aggression are paramount to the successful use of this techni'ue.

&f the practitioner is stuck in a dark space< wa9ing the

arms and legs from side to side is appropriate. &f the practitioneris in water< swimming with determined< powerful strokes would

be suitable recourse. The type of action 9ery much depends on the

specific situation along with an aggressi9e desire on the part of

the practitioner.

6s a rule< the effect of such mo9ements and relocations

comes 'uite 'uickly< especially if attention is focused on all the

accompanying sensations.

Ima+inin+ reality

This interesting techni'ue should be used by eperienced

practitioners< or if all other deepening techni'ues fail.

3






6 practitioner aggressi9ely imagines being located in the

physical world< eperiencing its intrinsic reality of perception<

and not in the phase. This should be done while in a state of

separation from the body with a sense of 9ision present. &fsuccessful< the surrounding phase space will immediately brighten

and sensory perception of the phase will eceed the normal

eperience of reality.

&f this techni'ue produces no clear results after a few

seconds< another techni'ue should be used.

G'!'&A0 ACTI7IT"

6ll deepening techni'ues should be practiced with a high

le9el of aggression< with no pauses< only continuous< deliberate

action. &f techni'ues are practiced in a calm< relaed manner< then

deepening attempts will most often result in falling asleep or

returning to the body.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S )2&I!G )''P'!I!G

•4orgetting to perform deepening techni'ues when necessary.

•"arrying out unnecessary deepening while at a sufficient

depth.

•=alting deepening techni'ues before reaching maimum

realism in the phase.

•"arrying out main deepening techni'ues prior to ha9ing

become completely separated from the body< although at this timeonly primary deepening should be used.

•"ontinuing deepening techni'ues when results ha9e already

been achie9ed.

•6lternating too 'uickly between deepening techni'ues instead

of concentrating on each of them for at least fi9e to 1 seconds.

•Performing the techni'ues slowly and calmly instead of

aggressi9ely.•6pplying techni'ues of sensory amplification while stuck in a

shapeless< dark space when these should only be performed in a

9i9id and realistic place.






•Obser9ing obects located too far from the eyes during 9isual

sensori>ation instead of the re'uired four to fi9e inches.

•,hen peering< scrutini>ing a single detail of an obect for too

long when it is necessary to 'uickly switch from one detail to

another.

•Taking in a whole obect when peering while only parts of it

should be obser9ed.

•"oncentrating too long on the details of a single obect instead

of focusing on different obects in 'uick succession.

•Dong palpation of a single obect during sensory amplification

instead of rapidly switching from one obect to another.•*eepening while standing in place when it is important to

maintain constant motion.

•4alling headfirst with the eyes open< although the eyes must

be shut to a9oid crashing into the floor.

•4alling headfirst without the desire or intention of falling far

and 'uickly.

•4orgetting to use translocation techni'ues after hitting a deadend.

•4orgetting to alternate deepening techni'ues if some of them

are not working.

•4ear of the hyperrealism of the eperience and halting

deepening instead of calmly continuing with the techni'ue.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'&

1uestions

1. 6fter which phase entrance techni'ues is deepening

necessaryJ

2. ,hy is phase deepening necessaryJ

). 6re there cases where phase deepening is unnecessaryJ

+. ,hat le9el of reality should be achie9ed by deepeningJ

5. ,hen should deepening begin after entering the phaseJ

-. *oes deepening influence the length of a phase

eperienceJ

1






(. ,hy is primary deepening necessaryJ

3. May one touch one8s head when the performing

sensori>ation of feelingsJ

. !hould a practitioner look at curtains while peeringJ1. &s it effecti9e to apply peering at phase obects from a

distance of 1 to 1.5 yardsJ

11. "an peering be used during palpationJ

12. ,hen should the eyes be closed while falling headfirstJ

1). ,ould throwing punches like a boer help a practitioner

to deepenJ

1+. =ow calmly should the deepening techni'ues be

performedJ

Tasks

1. *e9ote the net three successful phases to perfecting

deepening techni'ues< using all of the methods described in

this chapter.

2. 7sing personal eperience< try udging which techni'ue

suits you best from personal eperience.

11






Chapter - .aintainin+

T' G'!'&A0 CO!C'PT O% .AI!TAI!I!G

hase #aintenance or &#aintaining* refers to techni9ues

that allo$ a practitioner to re#ain in the phase for the #ai#u#

a#ount of ti#e possi"le) ,ithout knowledge of AmaintainingB

techni'ues< the duration of the phase will be se9eral times shorter

than it could otherwise be. The shortest phases last ust a few

seconds. %eginning practitioners usually fear not being able to

eit a phase@ this shouldn8t e9er be a concern because the real

challenge is being able to maintain the phase state< which is easily

lost unless phase maintenance techni'ues are used.

Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles?

resisting a return to the wakeful state :known as a foul;< resistingfalling asleep< and resisting a false eit from the phase. 6s a rule<

the first two problems :return to a wakeful state< or falling asleep;

12






are often encountered by beginners< but the third difficulty :false

eit; manifests at later stages of practice.

Resistance to returning to the body is self0eplanatory<

whereas resistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. /ote9eryone knows that almost half of phase eperiences usually end

in a 'uite tri9ial way 0 falling asleep. 6 person usually looses

attenti9eness< his or her awareness dissipates< and e9erything

around gradually looses clarity and turns into what is for all

intents and purposes a usual dream.

Resisting a false eit from the phase is a lot more

surprising and dramatic. !ometimes a practitioner detects an

impending eit from the phase< subse'uent deepening techni'uesfail to work< resulting in what seems to be a return to the body

and physical reality. !ure that the phase has ended< a practitioner

may stand up and the fall asleep after percei9ing a few steps. &n

such cases< falling asleep most often happens without any

mo9ement< but while still lying in bed. The problem is that the

difference between the phase and reality can be so subtle that in

terms of internal or eternal indicators< the phase practically can8t

be distinguished from reality. Therefore< one must know the

necessary actions to take in the e9ent that the phase ceases< since

the end of a phase could actually be a trick and purely imagined.

There are specific solutions for the three problems

described in addition to general rules that apply to any phase

eperience. !tudying these rules should be gi9en ust as high a

priority as studying the specific solutions< since only some of

them< when applied separately< may help one to remain in the phase se9eral times longer than usual.

&n some cases< techni'ues for maintaining are not

applicable. =owe9er< knowledge of how to maintain is useful for

the maority of eperiences. 6lso< there might be situations when

someone need only resist a foul< while someone else may need to

resist falling asleep. 6ll of this is 9ery specific to each case and

can be determined only in practice.

,ith perfect knowledge of all the techni'ues formaintaining< a phase may last two to four minutes< which doesn8t

sound like an etended duration< but really is. 6 particularity of

the phase space is that achie9ing something and mo9ing around in

1)






it takes a minimum amount of time< mere seconds. Thus< so much

can be done during ) minutes in the phase that one literally needs

a list< so as not to waste any time.

There are theories that ha9e neither been pro9en nordispro9en claiming that time in the phase contracts and epands

relati9e to real time. Thus< one minute of real time while in the

phase may feel much longer in terms of phase time.

Perception of time 9aries from practitioner to practitioner.

/o9ices especially percei9e a real minute as more like fi9e to 1

minutes in the phase. This is determined by the particularities of

indi9idual psychology< state of mind< and the type of e9ents that

occur in the phase.&n order to understand how long a phase really lasted< one

does not need to try using a stopwatch in the real world. &t is

better to count how many actions took place in it and how much

time each of them could ha9e taken. The result will differ from

one8s first rough estimate se9eral times o9er.

The maimum duration the phase 9aries depends hea9ily

on the ability to apply phase maintenance techni'ues. !ome

practitioners ha9e difficulty breaking the two0minute barrier

while some find it easy to remain in the phase for 1 minutes or

longer. &t is physically impossible to remain in the phase fore9er

because e9en a 20minute phase is unheard of.

T'C!I12'S A!) &20'S AGAI!ST

&'T2&!I!G TO T' BO)"

Of the following techni'ues< constant sensory

amplification and as0needed sensory amplification are applied the

most often while performing phase maintenance. =owe9er< as

opposed to other technical elements of phase eploration< other

secondary techni'ues of maintaining often become mainstream

and the most appropriate for certain indi9iduals. Thus< all the

techni'ues should be studied< but the first two should be

considered 9ery carefully.

Constant Sensory Amplification

1+






The same sensory amplification described in the chapter

on deepening :"hapter -; also applies to AmaintainingB. &n

essence< ha9ing achie9ed the necessary depth of phase< one

should not stop to acti9ely agitate his or her perception but shouldkeep on doing this all the while< albeit not as acti9ely as during

deepening.

The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase< all

action should be focused on eperiencing the maimum possible

amount of tactile0kinesthetic and 9isual perceptions. This entails

constantly touching and eamining e9erything in minute detail.

4or eample< if passing by a bookcase< touch and eamine some

of the books in it< including their pages and corners. Tactileobser9ation should be performed on e9ery encountered obect.

Palpation may be applied separately as a background

sensation. This is done in order not to o9erload the sense of sight.

The hands should be touching something all the time< or better

still< rubbing each other.

As-!eeded Sensory Amplification

6pplying the as0needed sensory amplification techni'ue is

no different than constant sensory amplification. &t is used only

when a foul :a return to a wakeful state; is imminent or when

phase 9ision starts to blur and fade. 4or eample< while tra9eling

in the phase e9erything may start to blur< signaling a weakening

of the phase. 6t this moment< the practitioner should touch e9ery

a9ailable obect@ obser9e e9erything in fine detail. 6s soon as

returns to a clear and realistic state< actions may be continuedwithout needing to perform amplification.

Constant 7ibration

This techni'ue is used to maintain constant< strong

9ibrations in the phase. 6s pre9iously noted< 9ibrations are

generated by straining the brain or tensing the body without using

muscles. Maintaining strong 9ibrations will ha9e a positi9e effect

on the length of the phase.

Stren+thenin+ 7ibrations as !eeded

15






&n this case< 9ibrations are created and strengthened only if

signs of a foul become apparent. amples of foul indicators

include duality of perception or blurred 9ision. !trengthening

9ibrations will help to deepen the phase< allowing a practitioner tostay and continue within the phase.

)ivin+ eadfirst

This techni'ue is the same as the deepening techni'ue of

the same name. &f a phase is about to dissol9e< di9ing headfirst

with the eyes shut and a desire to di9e as 'uickly and deeply as

possible. 6s soon as phase depth returns< translocation techni'ues

may be used to keep from arri9ing at a dead end.

%orced %allin+ Asleep

6s soon as indicators of a foul appear< immediately lie

down on the floor and attempt forced falling asleep@ the same as

the phase entry techni'ue. 6fter successfully performing the

techni'ue :)01sec.; < a practitioner may get up and continue to

tra9el through the phase since the perception of reality and its

depth will most likely be restored. Resist actually fall asleep.

&otation

&f indicators of a foul appear< the practitioner should start

rotating around the head0to0feet ais. 7nlike the phase entry

techni'ue of the same name< the mo9ement does not ha9e to be

imagined. This is an absolutely real rotation in the phase. 6fter

se9eral re9olutions< depth will be restored and actions may becontinued. &f indicators of a foul persist< rotation should continue

until proper depth is achie9ed.

Countin+

*uring the entire phase< count to as large a number

possible 0 not ust for the sake of counting< but with a strong

desire to reach the highest number possible. "ounting may be

performed silently or out loud.This techni'ue works by creating a strong determination

to remain in the phase by pro9iding a goal that re'uires action in

the phase.

1-






0istenin+ in

&f there are any background sounds similar to those heard

while entering the phase 0 rumbling< whistling< ringing< bu>>ing<or si>>ling # these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the

phase by aggressi9e attempts at listening in< hearing the entire

range of internal sounds. The forced listening in techni'ue may

also be used for phase maintenance.

ookin+ onto the phase

6nother interesting method of AmaintainingB is hooking

onto the phase. &n the e9ent of an impending foul< grab onto anobect in the phase acti9ely palpate or s'uee>e it. 9en if a return

to the body occurs during this techni'ue< the hands will continue

to hold the phase obect and the physical hands will not be

percei9ed. %eginning with these phantom feelings in the hands<

separation from the body is possible. 6ny nearby obect may be

hooked? the leg of a chair< a drinking glass< a doorknob< a stone<

or a stick. &f there is nothing to grab hold of< clasp the hands

together or bite down on a lip or the tongue.

Two rules apply to using the techni'ues that help to resist

a phase eit. 4irst of all< ne9er think that the phase might end and

result in a return to the body@ thoughts like this are like

programming that immediately send the practitioner to a wakened

physical state. !econdly< do not think about the physical body.

*oing will also instantly return the practitioner to the body< e9erytime.

T'C!I12'S A!) &20'S

%O& &'SISTI!G %A00I!G AS0''P

Constant 2nderstandin+ of the Possibility of %allin+

Asleep

Most of the time< falling asleep while in the phase can beo9ercome by a constant awareness that sleep is possible and

detrimental to a continued phase. 6 practitioner must always

consider the probability of falling asleep and actions must be

1(






carefully analy>ed to ensure that they are based on real desires

and not on paradoical notions< which are common to dreams.

Periodic Analysis of A#arenessPeriodically asking the 'uestion< A6m & dreamingJB while

in the phase helps appraise situations and the 'uality of the

actions being performed at any moment. &f e9erything meets the

standards of full phase awareness< actions may be continued.

6sked on a regular basis< this 'uestion becomes habit<

automatically used while transitioning to the phase state. &f you

keep asking this 'uestion regularly< sooner or later it will arise

automatically at the moment when you are actually transitioninginto a dream. This will then help one to wake up< after which it is

possible to continue to remain in a full0fledged phase..

The fre'uency of the 'uestion should be based on a

practitioner8s ability to consistently remain in the phase. &f a

phase usually lasts fi9e to 1 minutes or more< it is not necessary

to ask the 'uestion more than once e9ery 2 minutes@ otherwise<

this 'uestion has to be asked fre'uently< literally once a minute<

or ust a little less often.

There is another important rule related to resisting falling

asleep? no practitioner should engage or participate in

spontaneous e9ents occurring in the phase. 9ents that are not

planned or deliberate lead to a high probability of being immersed

in the side action< which results in a loss of concentrated

awareness.

T'C!I12'S AGAI!ST

A! 2!&'COG!I:') PAS'

!ince the techni'ues of testing the realness of the end of

the phase are a little absurd and demand additional attention to

actions< they should only be used in those cases when they are

indeed re'uired. 7ntil then< one should simply bear them in mind

and use them only in moments of doubt. The same methods may be used to safely determine whether or not the practitioner is in

the phase when using techni'ues for entering it.

13






yper-concentration

!ince the cessation of the phase eperience may be

simulated and no different in terms of perception from a real eit<

differences between the physical world and the phase world must be acti9ely discerned. &n other words< a practitioner must know

how to determine whether a genuine phase eit has occurred.

6t present< only one eperiment is known to guarantee an

accurate result. The phase space cannot withstand prolonged close

9isual attention to the minute details of obects. ,ithin se9eral

seconds of acute eamination< shapes begin to distort< obects

change color< produce smoke< melt< or morph in other ways.

6fter eiting the phase< look at a small obect from adistance of four to si inches< and remain focused on it for 1

seconds. &f the obect does not change< a practitioner can be

assured that the surroundings are reality. &f an obect is somehow

distorted or askew< a practitioner knows that the phase is intact.

The simplest option is to look at the tip of the finger since it is

always close at hand. &t is also possible to take a book and

eamine its tet. Tet in the phase will either blur or appear as

alphabetical gibberish< or full of incomprehensible symbols.

Au>iliary techni6ues

There are a 9ariety of other procedures to test the

occurrence of a foul. =owe9er< since any situation< any property<

or any function can be simulated in the phase< these procedures

are not always applicable. 4or eample< some suggest that it is

sufficient to attempt doing something that is realisticallyimpossible< and< if a practitioner is in the phase< the impossible

action will be possible. The problem with this suggestion is that

the laws of the physical world may be simulated in the phase< so

flying< passing through walls or telekinesis may not be possible<

e9en in the deepest phase. &t has also been suggested that looking

at a clock twice in a row may help a practitioner determine

whether or not the phase is intact@ allegedly< the clock will display

a different time each time it is obser9ed. =ere again< the clock8sdisplay may not change in the phase.

Of all the auiliary procedures< one deser9es mention and

works in the maority of cases? searching for differences from

1






reality in the surroundings. 6lthough the usual surroundings of a

practitioner may be 1E accurately simulated in the phase< it is

9ery rare. Therefore< it is possible to figure out whether a phase is

intact by carefully eamining the room where e9erything is taking place. &n the phase< there will be something etra or something

will be missing@ the time of day or e9en the season will be

different from reality< and so on. 4or eample< when 9erifying

whether a foul occurred< a room may be missing the table

supporting a tele9ision set< or the table may be there< but be a

different color.

G'!'&A0 &20'S %O& .AI!TAI!I!G

The rules for maintaining the phase deal with resisting all

or most of the problems which cause a phase to end. !ome of

these rules are capable of increasing the length of stay in the

phase by many times and must be followed.

The practitioner should not loo% into the distance) &f

faraway obects are obser9ed for a long period of time< a foul may

occur< or one may be translocated towards these obects. &n order

to look at distant obects without problems< a practitioner has to

employ techni'ues for maintaining. 4or eample< from time to

time the practitioner should look at his hands< rub them against

each other< or maintain strong 9ibrations.

?onstant activity) 7nder no circumstances should a

practitioner remain passi9e and calm in the phase. The more

actions performed< the longer the phase is. The fewer actions #the shorter the phase. &t is enough to pause for thought< and

e9erything stops.

lan of action) There should be a clear plan of action

consisting of at least 5 tasks to be carried out in the phase at the

earliest opportunity. This is necessary for se9eral important

reasons. 4irst< the practitioner must not pause in the phase to think

about Awhat to do netB< which fre'uently results in a foul.

!econd< ha9ing a plan< the practitioner will subconsciously perform all of the actions necessary for staying in and maintaining

the phase to carry out all the tasks that ha9e been planned. Third<

intelligent and pre0planned actions permit focused ad9ancement

11






of purposeful actions 9ersus wasting phase eperiences on

whate9er comes to mind at a gi9en moment. 4ourth< a plan of

action creates necessary moti9ation and< conse'uently<

pronounced intent to perform the techni'ues to enter the phase.Stopping the +8) The less &nternal *ialogue :&*; and

reflection that occurs in the phase< the longer it lasts. 6ll thinking

must be concentrated on what is being achie9ed and percei9ed.

Talking to oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is

that many thoughts may act as programming in the phase and

e9en announcing them internally may introduce alterations<

including negati9e ones. 4or eample< thinking about the body

cause a return to it. The practitioner may also get lost in thought<which will lead to a foul. 6lso< sporadic thoughts usually and

'uite easily cause the practitioner to simply fall asleep.

. practitioner #ust try to re-enter the phase after

eperiencing a foul) 6lways remember that a typical phase

eperience consists of se9eral repeated entries and eits.

ssentially< in most cases it is possible to re0enter the phase

through the use of separation or phase state creation techni'ues

immediately after returning to the body. &f the practitioner has ust

left the phase< the brain is still close to it and appropriate

techni'ues may be applied in order to continue the ourney.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S (IT .AI!TAI!I!G

•4orgetting to try to re0enter the phase after it is o9er< although

doing so greatly helps to increase number of eperiences had.•!taying focused on techni'ues for AmaintainingB instead of

performing them as background tasks.

•$etting distracted by e9ents and dropping phase maintenance

techni'ues instead of continually performing what8s needed to

maintain the phase.

•!uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary

when the phase appears 9ery deep and stable< e9en though these

could be false sensations.

•7sing the necessary techni'ues too late.

111






•!topping due to uncertainty about further actions< while there

must always be a plan.

•4orgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase without

reali>ing it. Recogni>ing the risk of falling asleep must be a

primary focus.

•$etting pulled into e9ents occurring in the phase instead of

obser9ing and controlling them from the outside.

•4orgetting that techni'ues for AmaintainingB must always be

used to remain in as deep a phase as possible< and not ust for

maintaining any odd state.

•!topping the use of techni'ues for AmaintainingB duringcontact with li9ing obects< when the techni'ues must be used

constantly.

•"ounting without the desire to count as high as possible.

•Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation.

•Passi9eness and calmness instead of constant acti9ity.

•cessi9e thinking and internal dialogue when these should

be kept to an absolute minimum.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'&

1uestions

1. ,hat is a foulJ

2. ,hat is the minimum duration of the phaseJ

). ,hat do phase maintenance :AmaintainingB; techni'uescounteract besides fouls and falling asleepJ

+. ,hy might a practitioner think that the phase has ended when

it actually is still in progressJ

5. !hould AmaintainingB techni'ues always be usedJ

-. ,hat primary techni'ues work against the occurrence of

foulsJ

(. =ow can a practitioner hook onto the phaseJ

3. ,hile in the phase< what do thoughts about the body lead toJ. ,hat 'uestion should be asked in the phase in order to reduce

the probability of falling asleepJ

1. ,hat happens to an obect during hyper0concentrationJ

112






11. =ow else< apart from hyper0concentration< might a

practitioner effecti9ely recogni>e a false foulJ

12. ,hile in the phase< is it permitted to look into the distance for

a long timeJ1). ,hat is &* and how does the degree of it affect the duration

of a phase eperienceJ

1+. ,hat should a practitioner always do after an inad9ertent

return into the bodyJ

Tasks

1. *uring the net few phases< dedicate yourself to the singlegoal of maintaining as long as possible< using as many

maintaining techni'ues as you can.

2. 4igure out which techni'ues ha9e pro9en the most

effecti9e and comfortable for you< so that you may use these

later.

). &ncrease the duration of your a9erage phase to at least )

minutes :e9aluated obecti9ely;.

11)






Chapter D - Primary skills

T' 'SS'!C' O% P&I.A&" S3I00S

,hen dealing with a fully0reali>ed phase< re'uisite

knowledge is not limited to entry techni'ues< deepening and

maintenance of the state< translocation< or finding and interacting

with obects. &n order to feel comfortable< a practitioner has to

master or at least acclimate himself with a whole series of

techni'ues to correctly react in any number of situations. 4or

eample< a practitioner needs to know how to create 9ision< if it is

absent. 6ctions including passage through a wall or taking flight

in a deep phase do not happen easily< although these actions may

be assumed natural occurrences< since the phase eists apart fromthe physical world. &n addition to techni'ues that allow interaction

with the physical setting and surroundings of the phase< methods

must learned and applied to counteract fear if it forces a

practitioner to consciously and consistently lea9e the phase.

6 practitioner does not ha9e to know all the primary skills

by heart< but it is necessary to pay close attention to some of

them? emergency return< creation of 9ision< translocation through

obects< contact with animate obects< and< for many< skillsdedicated to fighting fear will also pro9e etremely rele9ant.

The final choice of methods that re'uire added focus on

the part of the practitioner must be made on the basis of personal

eperiences and problems faced while in the phase< since different

practitioners often ha9e completely different types of problems.

)ISC'&!I!G T' PAS'

Problems with phase identification during entry often arise

at the initial stages of studying the phase. 6 practitioner simply

cannot understand whether or not he or she is already in the

11+






phase. This uncertainty can manifest while lying down or while

practicing in other postures.

&f a practitioner is simply lying down< physically

percei9ing his own body< and doing nothing< then it is indeeddifficult to determine whether or not he is present in the phase. &t

is sufficient to note that there might be no signs of a phase state.

On the contrary< there may be a host of signs and unusual

sensations< but they by no means necessarily indicate the onset of

the phase.

The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is always

sol9ed through actions. &f the practitioner is lying down< then

standard separation techni'ues may produce indication of phaseachie9ement 0 in the maority of cases # since such techni'ues

may often be incorrectly performed.

&t is possible to perform techni'ues that are only

achie9able in the phase state. &f a practitioner stands up and does

not recogni>e his surroundings< then it can be assumed that the

practitioner is standing up in the phase. =owe9er< often based on

the obser9ation that Ae9erything is as in realityB< a practitioner

may stand up and note that e9erything is in fact Aas in realityB

simply because the practitioner is still in ArealityB. &n answer to

this dilemma< the phenomenon of hyper0concentration has been

pre9iously mentioned in relation to maintaining phase. %y using

hyper0concentration< it is always possible to ascertain whether the

practitioner is in the phase. =owe9er< as a rule< hyper0

concentration is rarely necessary. Most often< the following signs

indicate that separation has occurred in the phase? unusualsensations in the body during mo9ement< etreme tightness

during mo9ement< a strong physical urge to lie back down<

disointedness of surroundings< and blurred or complete absence

of 9ision.

Often< the problem resides in the use of direct techni'ues

where the practitioner epects fast results and attempts to

determine whether the phase has been achie9ed. 6s a principle

this should not be done. ,hen using direct techni'ues< the phasemanifests itself clearly@ therefore< if an attempt to determine its

presence is made< it is an indicator that the phase is 'uite likely

still far off.

115






'.'&G'!C" &'T2&!; PA&A0"SIS

!tatistics show that in one0third of initial phaseeperiences< a practitioner is faced with a degree of fear that

forces a return to the body. Periodically< e9en eperienced

practitioners face situations that re'uire an abrupt return to

wakefulness. This presents a number of concerns.

&n and of itself< returning to the body is almost always

unproblematic@ remembering and thinking about the body often

suffices and within moments the practitioner is returned to the

body from whate9er location in the phase. 6dmittedly< it isad9isable during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain

from touching anything. 6s a rule< when these actions are

performed< simply standing up in the physical world is all that is

re'uired to complete a return@ howe9er< this is not always simply

achie9ed.

!ometimes after reentering the body< the practitioner

suddenly reali>es that physical functionality has ceased due to the

onset of sleep paralysis< or the sensation that the body has beenswitched off. *uring sleep paralysis< it is impossible to scream<

call for help< or e9en mo9e a finger. &n the maority of cases< it is

also impossible to open the eyes. 4rom a scientific point of 9iew<

this is a case of an abrupt< unnatural interruption of the rapid eye

mo9ement :RM; phase of sleep< during which this paralysis is

always present< and it can persist for some time after the phase is

interrupted.

This is where it gets interesting. People in the physical

world are accustomed to an important rule? if you wish to achie9e

something< then do it< and do it as acti9ely as possible. This rule<

though good< is not always applicable to certain conditions linked

to the phase< and applies least of all to eiting the phase.

!ometimes etreme effort makes it possible to break through

sleep paralysis and resume mo9ement< though most of these

efforts tend to eacerbate immobility.*ue to the unusual nature of a negati9e situation following

a deliberate< fear0induced return to the body< the depth of the

phase may greatly increase because of the body8s natural<

11-






protecti9e inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral

corte@ this results in e9en greater agitation< greater fear. The

paralysis grows stronger. This is a 9icious circle that leads to

unpleasant feelings and emotions< which may e9aporate anydesire to practice the phase.

&gnorance of correct procedures has led to the widespread

opinion that such ad9erse situations may make it impossible to

come back from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is<

therefore< dangerous to get in9ol9ed with the practice. =owe9er<

the solution to this problem rests in 9ery simple actions and

procedures that can pre9ent a large number of negati9e

eperiences?

Complete &ela>ation

&n the section on deepening and maintaining< it was noted

that the more acti9e a practitioner is while in the phase< the better.

"on9ersely< if there is less acti9ity< the 'uality of the phase

declines< allowing for an easy eit. Thus< in order to lea9e the

phase< the practitioner only needs to completely rela and ignore

any percei9ed sensations< actions< or thoughts. 6 practitioner may

also recite a prayer< mantra< or rhyme< since that helps the

consciousness to be distracted from the situation more 'uickly. Of

course< one needs to calm down and try to get rid of the fear<

which in and of itself is capable of keeping such a state going.

Periodically< the practitioner should try to mo9e a finger in order

to check whether attempts at relaation ha9e had an effect.

Concentration on a %in+er

6 practitioner eperiencing sleep paralysis should try

mo9ing a finger or a toe. 6t first this won8t work< but the

practitioner has to concentrate precise thought and effort on the

action. 6fter a little while< the physical finger will begin to mo9e.

The problem with this techni'ue is that the practitioner may

accidentally start making phantom motions instead of physical

mo9ements< which is why an understanding of the difference between the two sensations is necessary< since it is often not 9ery

ob9ious.

11(






Concentration on Possible .ovements

The physiology of sleep paralysis< the phase state< and

dreams are such that when the practitioner is in one of these

states< some actions are always associated with mo9ements madein the real body. This is true when mo9ing the eyeballs< the

tongue< or while breathing. &f the practitioner concentrates

attention on these processes< it is possible counteract inhibitions

to physical mo9ement@ as a result< a sleep0paraly>ed practitioner

will become able to mo9e in reality.

&eevaluatin+ the Situation

7nder normal circumstances< deliberate eit from the

phase is not the norm. *eliberate eit is commonly caused by

certain fears and preudices. &f a practitioner is not able to acti9ate

the body using other emergency return techni'ues< a careful

consideration the possibilities offered by the phase is

recommended. There are many interesting and useful things that

can be eperienced in the phase. ,hy ruin the possibility of great

opportunity because of a baseless fearJTo be fair< it must be noted that emergency eit techni'ues

do not always work. 6s a rule< after a long period of sleep

depri9ation< or at the beginning of or in the middle of a night8s

sleep< the urge to sleep is so great that it is difficult to resist the

sleep paralysis phenomenon. &n this respect< ree9aluating the

situation is highly recommended so that a practitioner is able to

take ad9antage of the situation 9ersus suffering by it. !leep

paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state by means ofindirect techni'ues.

By the $ay, %no$ing ho$ to eit paralysis is i#portant not

only for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs

even $ithout the phase for approi#ately one-third of the hu#an

population at least once in a lifeti#e) +t usually happens "efore or

after sleep)

%IGTI!G %'A&

4ear in the phase is a 9ery common occurrence. The

practitioner may eperience fear at any stage< although it is

113






epressed much more clearly during initial practice. The causes of

fear are 9ery di9erse? a feeling that returning to the body is

impossible@ a fear of death@ worrying that something bad is going

to happen to the body@ encountering something scary and terriblein the phase@ painful sensations@ o9erly sharp< hyper0realistic

sensations. One fear dominates all others? the instinct of self0

preser9ation< which< without any apparent reason< can induce a

feeling of absolute horror # a feeling that cannot be eplained or

controlled.

4or a no9ice stricken by insurmountable fear that causes

paralysis< there is only one way to gradually o9ercome. ach time

a no9ice enters the phase< an attempt should be made to go a stepfurther than the pre9ious time. 4or eample< in spite of feeling

terrified< the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then

mo9e them back to the initial position. The second time< the

practitioner should attempt to sit down. The third time< standing

up should be attempted. The fourth time< walking around in the

phase is ad9ised. Then< after incremental steps toward

eperiencing the harmlessness of the phase state< producti9e< calm

action may ensue.

Interesting fact!

Fear itself can "e used to enter

the phase and re#ain there for a long

ti#e) Once fears are allayed, a cal#ed

practitioner is eperiences increased

difficulty $ith entry into the phase)

4or a practitioner who faces periodical fears< reali>ing that

there is no real danger encourages progress in practice. 7rges to

rapidly return to the body are then made baseless. !ooner or later<

calmer thought dominates e9ents in the phase< and fear happens

less often.

,hen dealing with momentary fear caused by e9ents in

the phase< the simplest solution is to tackle it head0on and followthrough to the end in order to a9oid a fear0dri9en precedent. &f a

practitioner always runs away from undesirable e9ents< the e9ents

will occur more and more fre'uently. &f a practitioner is incapable

11






of facing fear in the phase< it is best to use the translocation

techni'ue to tra9el elsewhere< although this solution only

produces temporary relief.

C&'ATIO! O% 7ISIO!

Fision is often a9ailable at the 9ery beginning of a phase<

especially when the practitioner uses image obser9ation and

9isuali>ation techni'ues to enter. !ometimes 9ision appears

within the first few seconds. Other times< it manifests during the

deepening process. =owe9er< there are cases where 9ision is not

a9ailable and must be created 'uickly< at any cost. Fision mayarri9e as soon as it is thought about< but if this does not occur< a

special techni'ue is necessary.

To create 9ision< a practitioner needs to bring the hands

four to si inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them

through the grayness or darkness. Peering aggressi9ely and

attenti9ely at the minute details of the palms will cause them to

appear< much like they are being de9eloped on Polaroid film.

6fter se9eral seconds< 9ision will become clear< and along with

the palms< the surroundings will also become 9isible.

7nder no circumstances should the physical eyelids be

opened. Fision will appear on its own and will not differ from

that of reality and the physical sensation of opened eyes will

emerge. &t is possible to shut the eyes in the phase an infinite

number of times< e9en without ha9ing opened them at all< since

the latter is not needed for creating 9ision. The physical eyelidsmay be open only while eperiencing a 9ery deep phase. &n a

shallow phase< opening the eyes will cause a return to

wakefulness.

The practitioner must also keep in mind that 9ision should

only be created after a complete separation from the body and a

subse'uent translocation has been achie9ed. 6ttempting to 9iew

the hands during flight or while ho9ering in an unidentified space

leads to arbitrary translocation.

CO!TACT (IT 0I7I!G OBE'CTS

12






Two problems may surface while con9ersing with animate

obects in the phase? silence or a return to the body. &n 9iew of the

fact that many phase applications are based on contact with

people for one purpose or another< it is necessary to understandhow to correctly manage contact with li9ing obects.

&n order to a9oid a foul :eection from the phase into

reality;< the elementary rules of AmaintainingB must be obser9ed.

6cti9ely obser9ing the facial features or clothing of a person you

want to communicate with. ,hile communicating< the

practitioner should constantly rub the hands together or maintain

strong 9ibrations by straining the brain. Remember to perform the

techni'ues to a9oid becoming absorbed in communication.6 more comple problem is o9ercoming the

communicati9e unresponsi9eness of obects in the phase. &n many

cases< the speech of an obect is blocked by the internal stress of

the practitioner. !ometimes the problem stems from an

epectation that an obect will not be able to communicate in the

phase.

&t is important to treat the obects in a calm manner. There

is no use trying to shout or beat the obect to force

communication. On the contrary< it is much more effecti9e to treat

the obect gently< without applying pressure. *o not peer at an

obect8s mouth< epecting sounds to emerge. &t is better to look

elsewhere@ taking a passi9e interest in communication generally

yields the best results.

6s a rule< the first time that communication with a li9ing

obect is successful< future attempts go unhindered."ommunication methods in the phase are should be no

different than those used in ordinary life? talking< facial

epressions< gesturing with the hands< body language. Telepathy

is not necessary.

&'A)I!G

Reading tet in the phase may be accompanied by anumber of difficulties. 4irst< small print becomes illegible because

the affects of hyper0concentration may distort tet. This problem

is sol9ed by using large0font tetual sources of information. 4or

121






eample< the tet of a normal book blurs when obser9ed too

attenti9ely< but the large font on the co9er of a book is easily read

since its si>e is sufficient for rapid reading without detailed

scrutiny.The second problem encountered while reading in the

phase is when tet is legible but is completely meaningless in

composition@ gibberish. This problem is sol9ed by turning o9er

the pages< looking for a readable message. &t is also possible to

find another copy or create it anew using the obect0finding

techni'ues. The same applies to cases where the tet is seen as a

set of incomprehensible symbols or signs.

,hile reading in the phase< the practitioner should notforget about performing AmaintainingB techni'ues to pre9ent a

foul by becoming too relaed.

7IB&ATIO!S

The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably

unusual sensation that may be used successfully to enter< deepenor maintain the phase. &t is difficult to describe it better than the

sensation of a hea9y current passing through the entire body

without causing any pain. &t may also feel like the whole body is

contracting< or a tingling sensation similar to numbness. Most

often< the sensations are similar to high0fre'uency 9ibrations of

the body< which eplains the origin of the term A9ibrationB.

&f the practitioner is not sure whether or not he

eperienced 9ibrations< then there is a good method to sol9e his problem? if he really did< he will not ha9e any doubts about it. &n

all other cases< when there are doubts and uncertainty< the

practitioner is definitely not dealing with 9ibrations< or is dealing

with another form thereof.

&f you ha9e eperienced 9ibrations at least once< the

recollection of these sensations helps greatly during the

simultaneous application of indirect techni'ues. They are created<

supported and strengthened by straining the brain or tensing the body without using the muscles. 4or 9ibrations to appear< it often

suffices merely to think about them. *uring the first eperience<

one should eperiment with them for a while by rolling them

122






around the body and its parts< as well as strengthening and

weakening them.

5o$ever, one should not thin% that the presence of

vi"rations is a necessary condition for "eing in the phase) Manyno9ices often stri9e not for the phase but for 9ibrations< after

which the former must supposedly follow. That should not be the

case. There are indeed specific techni'ues that make it possible to

get into the phase by creating 9ibrations< but in all other cases

they are not necessary and some practitioners may ne9er ha9e

them at all.

T'C!I12'S %O& T&A!S0OCATI!G

T&O2G OBE'CTS

&n a deep phase< the properties of the surrounding

en9ironment become 9ery similar to the physical world. =owe9er<

it may sometimes be necessary to pass through a wall or

translocate to a9oid a physical barrier in the phase. There are two

basic options for passing through barriers like walls. 7sually<mastering these re'uires se9eral attempts.

Interesting fact!

+f a practitioner concentrates on

the physical sensations associated $ith

passing through a $all, it is possi"le to

get stuc%) . practitioner #ay even

eperience the feeling of o"structed"reathing $hen this happens) .t such a

ti#e it is necessary to return to the "ody)

&apid )efocused Penetration

Run or ump at a wall with a burning desire to penetrate it.

*on8t focus on the wall@ instead concentrate on the immediate

surroundings. *o not try to take anything from the current

location since this may impede a successful passage through the

wall.

12)






The Closed 'yes Techni6ue

,hen approaching a wall< the practitioner must close his

eyes and completely focus on a desire to pass through it while

imagining that the wall does not eist< or that it is transparent and penetrable. !urface resistance should be pressed through<

continuing on with the aggressi9e desire and concentration.

%0IGT

Taking flight in the phase is a simple matter of

remembering past dreams of flight. /othing needs to be tensed<

no word need to be said. 6ttempting flight with closed eyes produces a high rate of success< but presents an increased

probability of inad9ertent translocation.

&f a flight attempt is unsuccessful< a practitioner may try

umping from a high ele9ation or from a window. The natural

instinct of dream flight takes o9er and the fall becomes a

controlled flight. =owe9er< umping from windows or other

ele9ations is ad9isable only to practitioners with eperience< since

no9ices may not always be able to determine whether they are in

the phase or in reality.

6nother way to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air

when umping up.

S2P'&-ABI0ITI'S

The realism of the phase space does not impose limits onthe ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the

physical world. &t is important to remember that only a

practitioner8s apprehension places limits on what may be done in

the phase.

4or eample< if a practitioner needs to get to a location 0

e9en 9ery far away 0 it may be reached by teleportation. &f an

obect needs to be mo9ed from one side of the room to the other<

it may be mo9ed by telekinesis. One of the maor benefits of the phase eperience is unencumbered freedom of action.

To master unusual abilities< only a few phases need to be

spent in concentrated de9elopment of the methods.

12+






Telekinesis

&n order to learn telekinesis :mo9ing obect by thought;<

the practitioner concentrate on an obect while eperiencing adeepened phase< and attempt to mo9e the obect by thinking about

the mo9ement. The only re'uired action is aggressi9e

9isuali>ation of the obect8s mo9ement. /o specific eternal

actions are re'uired. Telekinetic ability is inherent to e9ery

human being. &f attempts are unsuccessful at first< press on.

%efore too long< the full effect of the practitioner8s will yield

results. 7sing this ability helps to encourage a good phase

eperience by pro9iding a tool for carrying out planned tasks.

Pyrokinesis

&gniting an obect in the phase ust by staring at it re'uires

a strong desire to heat up and set fire to the obect. Performed

successfully< an obect will smoke< distort< darken and then burst

into flames.

Telepathy

To de9elop telepathy in the phase< it is necessary to peer at

animate obects while listening surrounding eternal and internal

sounds with the intention of hearing thoughts epressed by

thought. 9en eperienced practitioners encounter difficulty

while de9eloping telepathy< but when successful< contact with

people in the phase is substantially simplified. 7sing telepathy<

discerning the thoughts of people< animals< and obects is possible. =owe9er< this should not be taken too seriously< since it

is merely the nature of the phase to simulate what is epected.

Transmutation

Transforming an obect8s form re'uires the techni'ue of

transmutation :refer to "hapter ;. &t should also be noted that if

the goal is not to con9ert something but rather to transform

oneself< then it is necessary to use the translocation techni'ues:also described in "hapter ;< whereby attention has to be

concentrated not on the desired place but on the desired form.

=ere again there are no limitations apart from indi9idual courage

125






and fantasy. &t is possible to become a butterfly or a dinosaur. &t is

possible to become a bird or a worm. &t8s e9en possible to become

a child or a person of the opposite se. These are not simply

eternal changes< but real transmutations< within and without. &f a practitioner becomes a butterfly< it accompanies the sensation of

ha9ing wings< many legs< and an unusual body. The practitioner

will intuiti9ely know how to control each part of this new body.

This is a superficial description of the transmutation eperience<

which ob9iously defies a customary understanding of reality.

T' I.PO&TA!C' O% CO!%I)'!C'

6 crucial factor in de9eloping phase abilities is self0

confidence in the ability to use the skills. &nitially< these abilities

are absent because the human brain< tuned in to ordinariness<

blocks confidence in the ability to do anything unusual. 6s soon

as strong confidence is reached in the performance of phase

abilities< all others become easy to achie9e.

6lthough confidence in phase abilities may grow strong<

practitioners should remain soundly aware that abilities in the

phase are limited to the phase. 6ttempting telekinesis<

pyrokinesis< or transmutation in the real world is a waste of time

and energy.

CO!T&O00I!G PAI!

6long with all the positi9e eperiences and sensations thatmay be enoy in the phase< painful eperiences nature may also

manifest. Punching a wall in a deep phase state will cause the

same pain as if a wall had been struck in physical reality.

!ome actions in the phase may una9oidably cause

unpleasant feelings of pain@ therefore< it is necessary to know how

to a9oid painful actions. 4ocusing on an internal confidence that

pain will not result from an action will alle9iate the problem. 6

practitioner may eperiment with this type of focus by pummeling a wall while resol9ing that there is no pain. &f the

eperiment succeeds< then obtaining the same result will ne9er

12-






again re'uire the same le9el of effort@ thinking that the phase is

painless will suffice.

.O&A0 STA!)A&)S I! T' PAS'

4rom the 9ery beginning< it should be understood that the

moral compass of phase space has nothing in common with the

properties and laws in the physical world that promulgate reality.

The phase space seemingly imitates the physical world with all its

properties and functions only because we are used to percei9ing it

and are not epecting anything else. Moral principles and rulesapply only to the place where these ha9e been. &t does not make

sense to follow the same rules while in the phase.

The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in

the phase because some would be unacceptable< improper< or bad

in the real world. These are merely beha9ioral patterns that are

unfounded in the world of the phase< where e9erything operates

on the basis of entirely different laws.

The only moral rules that might eist in the phase arethose that the practitioner establishes. &f desired< complete<

unhindered freedom may be eperienced.

ST2)"I!G POSSIBI0ITI'S A!) S'!SATIO!S

/o9ice practitioners should not immediately rush towards

a single specific goal if long0term practice is desired. &t is better to

etensi9ely in9estigate the phase and its surroundings beforefocusing on accomplishment. This will build intimacy with the

eperience and allow unhindered entry and interaction with the

phase.

6s in reality< learning whate9er first re9eals itself is the

key to increasing and speciali>ing knowledge. 6 beginning

practitioner should at first enoy the simple fact of actually being

in the phase< then lean its details and functions. Once inside the

phase< a practitioner should eplore it< eamining and interactingwith e9erything encountered.

=e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings

in the phase in order to fully understand how unusual the phase is

12(






in its realism. 6 practitioner must eperience mo9ement? walking<

running< umping< flying< falling< swimming. Test the sensations

of pain by striking a wall with a fist. The simplest way to

eperience taste sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try toeat e9erything that you find there< at the same time not forgetting

to smell each item. ,alk through the walls< translocate< create

and handle obects. plore. 6ll these actions are 9ery interesting

in and of themsel9es. The possibilities really are infinite.

=owe9er< only when they are well understood and thoroughly

eplored can it be said that the practitioner really knows what the

phase is about.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S (IT P&I.A&" S3I00S

•,hen trying to discern whether or not a phase is intact< a

udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physical

en9ironment. &n the phase< physical attributes are simulations.

•=yper0concentrating on an obect for too short a time while

trying to determine whether the surroundings are in the phase orin the physical world.

•*eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely when

the entire natural length of the phase should be taken ad9antage

of.

•Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm< relaed action.

•Refusal to practice the phase because of fear< though this

problem is temporary and resol9able.

•Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this

fre'uently leads to a foul.

•Premature attempts to create 9ision in the phase< whereas

separating from the body and deepening should occur.

•cessi9e haste while creating 9ision although in the maority

of cases 9ision appears naturally.

•,hile concentrating on the hands to create 9ision< doing so at

an ecessi9e distance 9ersus the recommended four to si inches.•4orgetting about the techni'ues for AmaintainingB while in

contact with li9ing obects.

123






•4orgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing 9ision when

translocating through walls or other solid obects.

•*esiring to do something superhuman in the phase without

the re'uired internal desire and confidence.

•4ear of eperiencing pain in the phase instead of learning to

control it.

•Obser9ing moral standards in the phase when they do not

apply.

•6 tendency to immediately use the phase for something

practical instead of first thoroughly eploring and interacting with

the surroundings.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& D

1uestions

1. 6re there skills in the phase that must first be mastered

before the phase may be used to its full etentJ

2. &s it possible to understand whether a phase is intact byattempting to flyJ

). =as a practitioner most likely gotten up in the phase or in

reality if there are doubts about thisJ

+. &s it sufficient to think about the body in order to return to

it< and is it only re'uired to return into the body in order to

control itJ

5. ,hich arm should be acti9ely and aggressi9ely mo9ed to

o9ercome sleep paralysisJ

-. &s it possible to tell okes to oneself to o9ercome sleep

paralysisJ

(. &s it possible to mo9e the physical eyes while in the phaseJ

3. ,hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be

o9ercomeJ

. "an sleep paralysis occur without practicing the phaseJ

1. ,hat if fear is not addressed and con'ueredJ

11. &s it possible to gradually master the phase in order to

o9ercome fearJ

12. &s there cause for fear of anything in the phaseJ

12






1). 6t what point can 9ision be created in the phase by

opening the eyelids and not through the use of special

techni'uesJ

1+. ,hat would happen with an attempt to open the eyes aftersitting up in bed< i.e.< before becoming completely separated

from the phaseJ

15. ,hy may contact with li9ing obects in the phase cause a

return to the bodyJ

1-. ,hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the

mouth of a talking obectJ

1(. &n the phase< how 'uickly can small tet be readJ

13. ,hich is easier to read in the phase? tet in a newspaper ortet on a large billboardJ

1. &s it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of tet while

reading in the phaseJ

2. &s it possible to burst through a wall after running up to it

with the eyes shutJ

21. ,hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying

in the phaseJ

22. 6re there any etrasensory abilities that are inaccessible in

the phaseJ

2). "an a practitioner transform into a ball while in the phaseJ

2+. =ow does pain in the phase differ from pain in the

physical worldJ

25. !hould a practitioner gi9e up a seat to an elderly person

while in the phaseJ

2-. *ue to moral considerations< what is prohibited in the phaseJ

Tasks

1. *uring your net phase session< walk around your home

in9estigating the rooms< kitchen< and bathroom in detail.

2. Dearn to pass through walls. "ompletely dedicate one long

phase eperience to perfecting this skill.). Dearn to fly in the phase.

+. ,hile in a deep phase< learn to control pain by hitting a

wall with your fist.

1)






5. ,hile in the phase< learn telekinesis :the ability to mo9e

obects by thought; and pyrokinesis :setting obects on fire<

also performed by thought;.

-. *edicate a lengthy phase eperience to an eperiment with9ision? create it if it is not already a9ailable< and then shut

your eyes and recreate 9ision. *o this at least ten times o9er

the course of a single phase

(. $et obects in the phase to start talking.

3. *edicate a long phase to searching for different kinds of

tets in order to eperiment with reading 9arious si>e fonts.

1)1






Chapter F - Translocation and %indin+

Obects

T' 'SS'!C' O% T&A!S0OCATIO!

A!) %I!)I!G OBE'CTS

Dike e9eryday reality< the phase space cannot be used for

certain purposes if it is not known how to mo9e around and find

necessary things. &n a wakeful state< it is more or less known

where something is located and how to reach it. &n the phase the

same assumptions cannot apply since phase mechanisms work by

different principles.

The reason for addressing translocation and findingobects in the same chapter is because both techni'ues rely on the

same mechanics that make the eistence of these techni'ues

possible. &n other words< the same methods 0 with minor

eceptions 0 can be applied to both translocation and finding.

6fter studying the techni'ues described in this chapter< a

practitioner in the phase will be able to go to any location and

find any obect. The only limitations that eist are those of the

imagination and desire@ if these are unlimited< so are the possibilities.

Regarding translocation< attention should not be focused

on methods for tra9elling through nearby spaces. 4or eample< a

practitioner may simply walk into an adacent room< or out to the

street 9ia the corridor or through the window. These are natural<

easy actions. 6 practitioner should instead concentrate attention

on how to mo9e to remote destinations that cannot be 'uickly

reached by physical means.&t is important to mention the necessary safety procedures

for translocation. !ometimes< due to a lack of eperience< a

practitioner may mistake the phase for reality< and reality may be

1)2






mistaken for the phase. Mistaking the phase for reality implies no

danger since a practitioner simply belie9es that an entry attempt

was unsuccessful. =owe9er< if reality is mistaken for the phase< a

practitioner may perform dangerous or e9en life0threateningactions. 4or eample< after getting out of bed in a wakeful state<

thinking that e9erything is happening in the phase< a beginner

may approach a window and ump out of it< epecting to fly< as is

customary in the phase. 4or this reason alone< shortcuts to flight

should only be taken after gaining a le9el of eperience that

makes it possible to unambiguously distinguish the phase from a

wakeful state.

&f a glitch occurs when practicing translocation techni'ues:for eample< landing in the wrong place;< a practitioner should

simply repeat the techni'ue until the desired result is obtained.

ither way< initial training is a must in order to make e9erything

easier for you later on.

6s far as obect0finding techni'ues are concerned< these

are used for both inanimate and animate obects. &n other words<

these techni'ues are e'ually effecti9e for finding< for eample< a

person or a utensil. =owe9er< there are se9eral techni'ues that are

only suitable for finding li9ing obects.

BASIC P&OP'&T" O% T' PAS' SPAC'

6ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a

primary law? the degree of changeability of the phase space is

in9ersely proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stabilityof its obects. That is< the deeper and more stable the phase< the

more difficult it is to perform something unusual in it because in a

deep< stable phase< the laws of it begin to closely resemble those

of the physical world.

1))






6ll translocation and finding obects techni'ues are based

on the knowledge of methods that bypass the primary law. The

secret lies in the fact that not only phase depth affects thecontrollability of the phase< but so does phase stability< which in

turn depends to a large etent on the number of sensations

eperienced in the phase. The techni'ues for translocation and

finding obects are used when these eperienced sensations are

weakened through certain actions.

&n other words< if a practitioner located in the phase holds

a red pencil and eamines it< tactile and 9isual perceptions are

engaged< which under sharp agitation cause the obect to eist inits complete form. =owe9er< as soon as the eyes are shut< the

stability of pencil image weakens. &n this situation< it will be

enough for the practitioner :after sufficient training; to

concentrate on belie9ing that the pencil is dark0blue in order for it

to appear dark blue after opening the eyes. This phenomenon

occurs because the color of the pencil is no longer determined by

perceptual areas of the brain and< therefore< it is possible to

change it.&f a red pencil is placed on a table and the practitioner8s

eyes are shut< and there is concentration on a thought that the

pencil is no longer on the table< then after opening the eyes< the

1)+






practitioner will find that the pencil has disappeared. &n essence<

when the pencil is lying on the table and the practitioner8s eyes

are closed< and the pencil is not being held< no perception is being

in9ested in the pencil< which the practitioner deletes usingautosuggestion.

7sing certain techni'ue0related methods< a practitionermay cause the stability of the phase state to remain in flu using

techni'ues that best suit the practitioner8s indi9idual personality.

T'C!I12'S %O& T&A!S0OCATIO!

Translocation throu+h Teleportation

This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni'ues

that beginners should use right away. To apply it< shut the eyes :if9ision is present;< and then concentrate attention on a thought0

form or image of a location elsewhere in the phase. 6t this

moment< there will be a string sensation of swift flight and within

two to 1 seconds< the destination will be reached.

The success of this techni'ue depends on a strong

concentration upon a single goal? the desired location. Practice

must be performed 9ery clearly< confidently< aggressi9ely< and

without distractions. 6ny unrelated thoughts ha9e a profoundlynegati9e influence on the performance of this techni'ue. They

unnecessarily prolong the flight< cause a foul< or result in arri9ing

at an undesired location.

1)5






Translocation throu+h a )oor

&n order to use this techni'ue< approach any door with the

strong belief that it leads to the re'uired location. 6fter openingthe door< the practitioner will see and be able to step into the

destination. &f the door was originally open< it must be completely

shut before applying the techni'ue.

6 drawback to this techni'ue is that its practice always

re'uires a door. &f there is no door< users of this translocation

techni'ue should create one using an obect finding techni'ue.

Translocation throu+h Teleportation #ith the 'yes

Open

This techni'ue is difficult because it re'uires an unstable

phase space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another

location. *uring teleportation by teleportation with eyes shut< the

practitioner disengages from the current location. ,hereas during

teleportation by flight with eyes shut the practitioner disentangles

himself from the current location< that is not the case here.

Therefore< this techni'ue should be used only by eperienced

practitioners who are confident that they are capable of remaining

in the phase.

6s far as implementing the techni'ue is concerned< the

practitioner simply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought

that he is already present in the desirable location and focus on its

image. &t is important to not stare at or touch anything during the

thought. !urrounding space will dim< blur and then disappearduring this time< and then the intended location will gradually

start to appear. The rate of space metamorphosis depends on the

degree of desire to reach the re'uired location.

&f concentration is weak or phase depth is poor< then after

space destabili>es< it may not be restored 0 and a return to the

wakeful state will occur.

Translocation #ith Closed 'yesThis is one of the easiest techni'ues. To use this

techni'ue< the practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and ha9e

an intense desire that< when the eyes are net opened< the re'uired

1)-






location will be reached. &n order to considerably increase the

effecti9eness of this techni'ue< it would be useful to imagine< at

the moment you close your eyes< that you ha9e already reached

the desired location. Translocation must occur then< and it has tohappen without the flight sensations that occur during

teleportation with closed eyes. Translocation must occur right

then< and it has to happen without the flight that occurs in

teleportation with closed eyes< which must be a9oided.

Translocation by Concentration on a &emote Obect

To perform this techni'ue< the practitioner should peer

from a distance at a minor detail of the desired location. Thegreater an intention to see an obect8s detail< the 'uicker the

arri9al at the obect8s location.

6 drawback to this techni'ue is that this type of

translocation is possible only for places that are already 9isible<

albeit from a great distance.

Translocation durin+ Separation

The simplest way to translocate is to do so while

separating from the body. mploying this techni'ue is etremely

simple and 9ery con9enient. &t may be combined with almost any

separation techni'ue and is performed by focusing on the image

and feel of a desired location during the initial stages of eiting

the body. &t is e9en better to imagine that phase entry will occur

and separation will complete in a chosen location.

Interesting fact!

.fter having changed his place of

residence, the practitioner $ill very

often continue for so#e ti#e to separate

fro# the "ody in the sa#e house $here

he $as used to doing this previously)

6 drawback of this techni'ue is that separation occursonly in the beginning of the phase eperience and< therefore< can

only be used once. Other options should be considered after the

first translocation.

1)(






Translocation by Passin+ throu+h a (all

This techni'ue is performed by walking or flying through

a wall with the eyes shut and a firm con9iction that the re'uiredlocation is behind the wall. The barrier does not necessarily ha9e

to be a wall. &t can be any non0transparent obect through which a

practitioner may walk or fly? a screen< a wardrobe< and so on.

The main drawback of this techni'ue is the necessity of

appropriate skills for penetrating through solid obects of the

phase. 6nother necessary condition for applying this techni'ue is

the presence of barriers to pass through.

Translocation throu+h )ivin+

This techni'ue is identical to passing through walls with

the only difference being instead of a wall 0 which may not

always be a9ailable 0 the practitioner will use the floor or the

ground. The practitioner must di9e headfirst with the eyes shut

and ha9e complete confidence that the re'uired location is

underneath the solid surface. The ability to pass through solid

obects is< naturally< also re'uired.

6 practitioner may di9e through the floor or the ground<

and also into any flat hori>ontal surface? a table< a chair< a bed<

and so forth.

Translocation throu+h &otation

6pply this techni'ue< a practitioner in the phase will to

start rotating on an ais while simultaneously concentrating on a belief that a desired location will be reached once rotation is

stopped. The eyes must be shut during the rotation< or 9ision must

not be focused on anything in particular. 6s a rule< two to fi9e

re9olutions on an ais are sufficient. Once again< e9erything

depends on the ability to fully concentrate on a desired goal

without any distractions.

OBE'CT %I!)I!G T'C!I12'S

Techni6ue of Translocation

1)3






6ll translocation techni'ues are also applicable to obect

finding techni'ues since the use of both techni'ues re'uires

altering the surrounding the space. &nstead of concentrating on a

location< the practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of aspace that is to be found or changed. 6s a result< finding the

necessary obect :pro9ided this techni'ue has been mastered; is

guaranteed< but maintaining the original location where the action

begins is not guaranteed.

&f the goal is to find an obect while remaining in the

present location< use the speciali>ed techni'ues described later on?

techni'ues that change only a portion of the phase space.

%indin+ by Callin+ a !ame

This techni'ue is only used to find li9ing obects. The

practitioner must call a person or an animal by name to cause the

animate phase resident to enter or appear nearby. The call should

be loud< nearly a shout< otherwise it will not always work.

$enerally< it is often enough to pronounce a name se9eral times to

achie9e results.

&f the desired animate obect does not ha9e a name or the

practitioner does not know it< then any name or general

summoning will do< like< A"ome hereB This should be done

while mentally focusing on a clear image of the desired person or

animal.

%indin+ by In6uiry

To perform this techni'ue< approach any person in the phase and ask him :or her; where to 'uickly find a desired obect.

6n accurate answer is usually gi9en straight away< and it should

be followed. =owe9er< to a9oid wasting time< do not forget to

mention that the obect must be found A'uicklyB< or specify that

the obect should be AnearbyB. *uring this communication< under

no circumstances should there be a doubt about the accuracy of

the information< since otherwise it may lead to a simulation of

what is epected.The drawback of this techni'ue is that it re'uires the

presence of an animate person and good skill at communicating

with obects in the phase< which can pro9e difficult.

1)






%indin+ by Turnin+ Around

&n order to use this techni'ue< the practitioner must

concentrate and imagine that the re'uired obect is locatedsomewhere behind his back< and after turning around he will

actually see it there< e9en if it was not there ust a moment earlier.

This works best if the practitioner< prior to turning around< did not

9iew the place where the obect is epected to appear.

%indin+ Around a Corner

,hen approaching any corner< concentrate and imagine

the re'uired obect is ust around the corner. Then< after turningthe corner< the obect will be found. 6nything that limits space

9isibility may be regarded as a corner. This does not ha9e to be

the corner of a house or another type of building@ it could be the

corner of a wardrobe< the corner of a truck< etc.

The drawback of this techni'ue is that it re'uires the

a9ailability of a sufficiently large corner that blocks the 9iew of

anything around the other side of it.

%indin+ in the and

This techni'ue is< in essence< only applicable to finding

obects that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this

techni'ue< concentrate on the idea that the obect is already in

hand. 6t that moment< the practitioner must not look at it. !oon

after beginning to concentrate on this idea< the practitioner will at

first feel a slight sensation of the obect lying in his hand<followed by a full sensation and appearance of the desired obect.

%indin+ by Transmutation

This techni'ue distorts the phase space while not

completely disengaging a perception of the space. The

practitioner must gi9e strong attention to a thought that a re'uired

obect is going to appear in a desired location. There must be

sufficient confidence that the practitioner8s desires will bereali>ed. 6t this moment< the process of metamorphosis will

begin? space will distort and dim< and the re'uired obect will

begin to manifest itself. 6fter this< brightness and focus will be

1+






restored with necessary alterations made present in the phase

space.

This techni'ue is relati9ely difficult to perform in

comparison to others< and< therefore< it is better to use it only aftera high le9el of eperience has been reached because it is difficult

to remain in the phase during any metamorphic process.

6s is e9ident in the name of this techni'ue< it can be used

to find obects and also create new obects from found obects.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S (IT T&A!S0OCATIO!

A!) %I!)I!G OBE'CTS

•6pplying translocation and obect finding techni'ues without

the precondition of a steady phase.

• &nsufficient concentration on a desire to tra9el to a location or

to find an obect.

•*oubting that results will be achie9ed instead of ha9ing

complete confidence.

•Passi9e performance of the techni'ues instead of a strongdesire and high le9el of aggression.

•4orgetting to repeat translocation or obect finding techni'ues

when the techni'ue did not work or worked incorrectly during the

first attempt.

•$etting distracted by etraneous thoughts during the lengthy

process of teleporting with eyes shut. Total concentration is

re'uired at all times.

•6pplying the techni'ue of teleportation with eyes openwithout ade'uate eperience.

•4ailing to immediately translocate when using the closed eyes

techni'ue@ this may induce flying a la the teleportation techni'ue.

•$lossing o9er minute details or only obser9ing the broad

features of a remote obect while applying translocation by

concentration.

•6 delayed desire to mo9e while translocating during

separation. 6n instantaneous desire to immediately mo9e is

necessary.

1+1






•4orgetting to first shut a door completely when using

translocation through a door@ otherwise< there will be contact with

what is already behind it.

•7sing a translocation techni'ue to go through a wall without

knowing how to pass through solid obects.

•Paying too much attention to the process of translocation

through a wall@ this leads to being trapped in the wall.

•4orgetting to shut the eyes while translocating di9ing

headfirst. The eyes should remain closed until after the techni'ue

is complete.

• &nsufficient internal association with an animate obect whilefinding it by calling its name.

•Trying to find an obect 9ia interrogation instead of passi9ely

communicating with li9ing obects of the phase.

•7sing distant corners when applying the techni'ue of finding

an obect around the corner. "hoose nearby corners to a9oid

wasting precious tra9el time.

•6pplying transmutation techni'ues without possessing

sufficient eperience in managing :AmaintainingB; the phase

space.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& F

1uestions

1. ,hat becomes possible with the ability to translocate inthe phaseJ

2. ,hat becomes possible with the ability to find obects in

the phaseJ

). ,hat do translocation and finding obects techni'ues ha9e

in commonJ

+. ,hat is the sole limitation on the possibilities offered by

translocation and finding obectsJ

5. =ow may one translocate across 9ery short distancesJ-. ,hen the flight techni'ue by umping out of a window be

attemptedJ

1+2






(. ,hat should be done if translocation and obect finding

techni'ues do not yield the re'uired resultJ

3. &s it possible to find a person from real life using the

techni'ue of finding obectsJ. *oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phaseJ

1. ,hat are the fundamental components of space and obect

stabilityJ

11. =ow large is the role of auditory perception in the stability

of spaceJ

12. ,hat is most important while using a teleportation

techni'ueJ

1). ,hat does speed of mo9ement depend on duringteleportationJ

1+. !hould a no9ice apply the techni'ue of teleportation with

open eyesJ

15. ,hat techni'ue might the translocation with closed eyes

techni'ue turn intoJ

1-. !hould large or small details be scrutini>ed while

translocating by concentration on remote obectsJ

1(. &s the techni'ue of translocation during separation applied

after separation or while beginning to separateJ

13. ,hen applying the techni'ue of translocation through a

door? is it better if the door is open or closedJ

1. ,hy might translocation by passing through a wall failJ

2. ,hen using translocation by di9ing< is it important to be

in a place where there is something to stand onJ

21. ,hile applying the techni'ue of rotation< should rotation be imagined or realJ

22. &s it possible to use a translocation techni'ue to attempt

finding obectsJ

2). ,hen using the techni'ue of calling by name< what should

be done if the name of a desired person in the phase is

unknownJ

2+. ,hile looking for an obect using the method of in'uiry< is

it important to specify that the obect needs to be foundA'uicklyBJ

25. =ow far back must a turn occur when the techni'ue of

finding obects by turning is being usedJ

1+)






2-. ,ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying the

techni'ue of finding obects around the cornerJ

2(. &s it necessary to shut the eyes while using the

transmutation techni'ueJ

Tasks

1. *edicate the net three phases to eperiments with

translocation techni'ues< using all of them and tra9elling

where9er you want.

2. 6fter eperiencing three phases dedicated to translocation<

select the techni'ues that work best for you.). *uring the net phase< tra9el to the iffel Tower< to the

Moon< and to the homes of some of your relati9es.

+. *edicate the net three phases to eperiments with the full

range of techni'ues for finding obects< including

translocation techni'ues.

5. 6fter three phases dedicated to finding obects< select the

techni'ues that you are most comfortable with.

-. &n the net phase that you eperience< find your mother<

and then at the same location locate this tetbook< a red globe<

and a green rose.

1++






Chapter *H - Application

(ou have in front of you a concise description of the

phases practical applications, al"eit in condensed for# as full

treat#ent of the topic re9uires #uch #ore than a single chapter)

. #uch #ore detailed description of $ays to practically apply the phase, along $ith techni9ues for doing so, are contained in the

"oo% &'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 212

Transfor#ation*) +t also provides #any ea#ples of the

pheno#enon in practice)

T' 'SS'!C' O% APP0ICATIO!S

%O& PAS' STAT'S

Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and

9ariety of eperience that the practitioner is often not concerned

with the 'uestion of how the phase might be purposefully used.

The critical 'uestion of application becomes e9en more critical as

eperience increases. 6pplication of the phase becomes more

9i9id against the background of understanding how the

phenomenon can pro9ide a means of gaining information and neweperiences.

!ome approach the phase practice with a predetermined

goal< uninterested in anything else. ,ith a specific goal< a

problem may arise in the origination of the goal because the phase

phenomenon is wrapped in a thick layer of preudices and

stereotypes< which often ha9e no bearing on the reality. The

primary purpose of this chapter is to precisely separate reality

from fiction. &ts second purpose is to pro9ide a detaileddescription of what may be obtained from the practice of phase

eperiences.

1+5






9ery pro9en and accessible practical application of the

phase is based on three 'ualities? a; application founded on the

phase8s ability to simulate any obect and any space with any

properties and functions@ b; application based on the opportunityto connect with the subconscious mind in order to obtain

information@ c; application based on the phase8s ability to impact

a practitioner8s physiology.

Most importantly< nothing described in this chapter is

difficult to achie9e. 6ny application may be achie9ed during the

9ery first phase if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the

appropriate techni'ues for translocation or finding obects.

Regardless of whether the practitioner adheres to a mystical or pragmatic world9iew< a full range of access is inherently possible.

Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly eceed

the scope of descriptions related through this chapter. &t is

possible that other applications simply ha9e not been pro9en yet<

and< so far< the correct methods of practicing these unknown.

Only the practitioner may determine the limits of possibility

within the phase. Of course< common sense should be applied< or

it would be logically and psychologically difficult to disengage

misconceptions. The goal of this chapter is to provide a real

Cthough #ini#al0 foundation that is fir# and unyielding,

$hatever the circu#stance) +f the practitioner follo$s a strict

approach to practice, it $ill "e #uch #ore difficult to "eco#e

lost during further practical and theoretical studies)

APP0ICATIO!S BAS') O! SI.20ATIO!

Many wonder about the nature of the phase state in

relation to the brain< i.e. whether or not the phase is all in one8s

head. %ut in the contet of applying the phase< this is not a 9alid

concern. Perception of the entire physical en9ironment is

performed through sensory organs. &n the phase< perception is the

same< sometimes e9en more realistic. ,hether e9erything

described in this chapter occurs in reality or is merely simulatedmakes no difference in terms of the encountered sensations.

Travellin+

1+-






• .round the $orld/ &t is possible to reach any point of the

planet< and it is particularly interesting to re9isit places where the

practitioner once li9ed or 9isited< and 9isit places that the

practitioner has a strong desire to 9isit. 9ery sight and beauty ofthe arth become accessible< be it the iffel Tower or an island in

Oceania< the Pyramids of gypt< or 6ngel 4alls.

• Through Outer Space? 6lthough humankind is not going

to reach Mars any time soon< any practitioner may stand on its

surface and eperience its uni'ue landscape through the use of

translocation in the phase. There is nothing more ama>ing than

obser9ing galaies and nebulae< planets< and stars from the9antage pint of 9ast space. Of all phase applications a9ailable< this

one pro9ides practitioners with the most striking aesthetic

eperiences.

• To different places in ti#e/ This makes it possible to 9isit

a childhood< to see what a person will look like in the future@ a

pregnant woman in the phase may see what her child will look

like. Tra9el far back in time and witness the construction of the

Pyramids at $i>a< see Paris in the 1(th century< wander amongthe dinosaurs of the Lurassic period.

• Through different $orlds/ Tra9el a world that has been

described in literature or ust in9ented by the practitioner<

de9eloped in the imagination. These could be etraterrestrial

ci9ili>ations< parallel worlds< or uni9erses from fairy tales and

films. 6ny destination is nearby.

'ncounters• :ith relatives/ !ince relati9es cannot always see each

other< there is the remarkable possibility to meet each other and

talk in the phase. Of course< this does not entail mutual presence.

&t is enough for one person to possess the re'uired desire 0 the

second person may ne9er e9en know. Reali>ing the desire to

contact a close relati9e and echange information is a treasure.

•:ith ac9uaintances/ "ircumstances often pre9ent seeing people who are important. This is an opportunity to reali>e a

desire and finally meet that certain person again.

1+(






• :ith the dead/ Regardless of the nature of the phase

phenomenon< nothing else yields the possibility to see< talk to<

and embrace a deceased lo9ed one. These are 9i9id< personal

eperiences< accessible to e9eryone< and achie9ing theseencounters does not re'uire maor difficulty. "ourage is the only

necessity. 4rom a techni'ue0related point of 9iew< a stable phase

and application of the finding obects techni'ue sets the stage for

what at first may seem impossible. &t should be noted that when a

deceased person is encountered in the phase< the distortions

caused by the obect finding techni'ue may lead to some 9ery

undesirable occurrences. &f you are interested in this subect< you

should carefully study the guidebook ?ontact $ith the 8eceased

:author? Michael Raduga;.

• :ith cele"rities/ Through the use of obect finding

techni'ues< a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous

person. This could be a historical persona< a contemporary

politician< or an artist. &n the phase state< they are all accessible

for any type of interaction. 4or eample< a practitioner could meet

Lulius "aesar< Lesus "hrist< /apoleon< "hurchill< !talin< =itler<l9is Presley< Marilyn Monroe< and a great many others.

&eali=in+ )esires

• 9eryone has dreams. Regardless of whether they e9er

come true in reality< they may at least enoy be reali>ed in the

phase. !ome dream of a 9isit to Das Fegas< some to dri9e a

4errari< some 9isit Outer !pace< others would like to bathe in a

pile of money< and some desire seual eperiences. 6ll of thesemay finally be eperienced in the phase.

Alternative to the 7irtual (orld

• &n the phase< young men may participate in game battles

as if the battles are real. 6 practitioner can 9isit unusual worlds

and places while enoying completely realistic sensations< feel a

weapon in his hands< and e9en the smell of gunpowder. &f desired<

e9en the sensation of battle wounds may be eperienced. $aming

possibilities in the phase are not limited by the power of a

microprocessor< but the etent of a practitioner8s imagination.

1+3






Creative )evelopment

• ?reating $or%s of art/ 7sing the methods of obect

finding or translocation< an artistic practitioner can purposefullyseek an obect in the phase that may be composed in real life. &f

necessary< it is possible to easily return to study an obect in the

phase. 4or eample< a painter may find a stunning landscape and

puts it to can9as in the real world while periodically returning to

the same landscape in the phase.

• Gie$ing future co#pleted $or%s of art/ &f an artist is in the

process of reali>ing an idea< then a preliminarily look at the endresult of a design may be seen in the phase. 6 painter can

eamine a painting in ad9ance@ a sculptor may see a completed

sculpture< and an architect will be able to wander through a house

that is still in the early stages of design. 6ny creati9e work can be

simulated in the phase.

• . source of inspiration and fantasy/ The phase practice

imparts ideas and desires that positi9ely affect creati9e endea9ors.

4urthermore< the reali>ation of desires and tra9els throughunusual spaces e9oke great emotions< which pro9ide ecellent

inspiration.

APP0ICATIO!S BAS') O! CO!TACT

(IT T' S2BCO!SCIO2S .I!)

6ssume that the phase state is ust an eceptionally

unusual state of brain and that perception within it is no more thanan unusually realistic play of its functions. 6ssume that a

practitioner in the phase decides to tra9el to a forest. To do so< the

translocation with closed eyes techni'ue is used< and< as a result< a

forest appears.

,hat happens if the 9ision contains 9ery detailed

knowledge of forests< what forests consist of< and where forests

originateJ The brain creates a hyper0realistic space superior to

that of e9eryday reality< consisting of millions of blades of grass<lea9es< hundreds of trees< and a multitude of sounds. ach blade

of grass has depth and build< not ust a point. ach leaf also

1+






consists of component parts. 6 uni'ue< natural pattern makes up

the bark of each tree.

!uddenly< a wind begins to blow through the forest< and

millions of lea9es and blades of grass< following a mathematicalmodel of the propagation of air masses< begin oscillating in a

wa9elike fashion. Thus< a certain resource inside us is capable in

mere seconds not only of creating millions of details in the

desired scene< but also to control each of those details

indi9idually

9en if the phase is ust a state of mind< this does not

mean that there are no sources of information within it. The mind

possesses great computing ability and is e'uipped to imagine thefull etent of the impossible. /o computer< howe9er powerful< is

capable of similar feats. 6 practitioner is able to somehow tap

into ama>ing resources while in the phase. &t only remains to learn

eactly how to achie9e mastery.

&t is possible that the phase space is go9erned by the

subconscious mind. This means that the practitioner is able to

contact the subconscious while in the phase state. *uring

e9eryday life< the subconscious mind sends information based on

calculations determined by enormous capabilities. =owe9er<

humans neither hear nor percei9e these signals because people are

accustomed to recei9ing information linguistically. The

subconscious mind hardly operates within the limitations of

language. "ommunication with the subconscious mind on a

conscious le9el is only possible within the phase. &f all phase

obects are created and controlled by the subconscious mind< thenit is possible to use them as translators. 4or eample< when

talking to a person in the phase< normal words are heard while the

obect and communicated information is controlled by the

subconscious mind.

6n eplanation of how information is obtained in the

phase can hardly be une'ui9ocally pro9en. Perhaps there are other

undisco9ered resources. %ut that is not so important. The most

important thing is definitely known? how to obtain information inthe phase.

The algorithm for obtaining information from the phase is

not comple. 6fter entering the phase< only the techni'ues for

15






obtaining information and the methods of 9erifying it need to be

learned to increase in knowledge gleaned from the phase.

%ased on the pragmatic eplanation of the nature of the

phase as an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious<

it may be assumed that the amount of information obtained in the phase is limited. &f the phase eists within the confines of the

brain< then the brain can only operate on data that has been

recei9ed by the brain o9er the course of its eistence. &ndeed< it

appears that e9erything percei9ed through the sensory organs is

remembered and correlated with other data@ this obser9ation

concern conscious and unconscious perception.

&f any e9ent is actually a conse'uence of other e9ents<

which were< in turn< also conse'uences of pre9ious happenings<then nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is known 0 then it

is possible to calculate what is implied by it.

6s a result< if e9erything is based solely on the resource of

the subconscious mind< then information may be obtained about

e9erything that is related to an indi9idual life? the practitioner8s

eperiences and the eperiences of those with whom the

practitioner eperiences life. Dessons are learned from the future

and past< and the future and past of others. 6ll in all< in order toapproach knowing the whole of the information a9ailable in the

151






phase< personal knowledge capacity would need to increase by

1 or e9en 1< times.

The only information that is not a9ailable in the phase is

that about which the subconscious mind does not ha9e any preliminary information. 4or eample< where to purchase a

winning lottery ticket that will win millions of dollars cannot be

learned since there is no data that could support the necessary

calculation. The subconscious mind will also not be able to show

the practitioner what a random street in a small town on the other

end of the arth looks like. 6 practitioner should not try guessing

what information the subconscious mind has to offer and what it

doesn8t because mistakes are easily made. 4or eample< if a practitioner has ne9er been to Paris and ne9er seen the iffel

Tower< it might be assumed that the practitioner8s subconscious

mind knows nothing about it either< although through o9er the

course of life< the mind has already recei9ed an enormous

'uantity of information from pictures< photographs< stories<

9ideos< books< and so forth.

There are three basic techni'ues for obtaining information

in the phase. ach of them has its ad9antages and disad9antages

that must be studied and learned before use.

Animate Obects Techni6ue;

To perform this method of obtaining information< the

practitioner< in a full deep phase< must locate a person by

techni'ues for finding obects and procure the necessary

information from that person through the use of simple 'uestions.&f the re'uired information is linked to a certain person< then that

person should be located in the phase. &f the information is not

related to anyone in particular< then it is possible to create a

uni9ersal information source< which must be associated with

wisdom and knowledge. 4or eample< this could be a wise

recluse< a well0known philosopher< or a guru.

The ad9antage of this techni'ue is that it is easy to pose

additional 'uestions and it is also easier to 9erify whate9erinformation is obtained. 6 drawback of this techni'ue is that< for

many< it is difficult to communicate with li9ing obects in the

152








able to properly control the obect in 'uestion and may recei9e

false information.

Interesting fact!The phase space is not everyday

reality therefore, it should not "e

treated $ith the nor#al "elief that every

o"servation should "e regarded as fact)

9en when a practitioner has learned to find animate and

inanimate obects with an absence of doubt< there is still no

guarantee that the recei9ed information is always accurate. 6 fewtechni'ue0related tricks are able to test an obect8s ability to speak

the truth.

4or eample< an obect can talk about something with

absolute confidence< but that does not mean that what it

communicates is all true. &f doubt is eperienced while finding the

obect< then doubt may ha9e an effect on what the obect says.

This is why doubt must be a9oided at all costs 0 although

beginners are bound to initially ha9e problems with this.

To determine whether an obect is able to gi9e accurate

information< a control 9uestion should be asked@ a 'uestion that

the subconscious mind cannot know the answer to. 4or eample< a

practitioner might ask a found obect? A,here can & buy the

winning lottery ticket for the Mega %all ackpotJB &f the obect

starts answering such 'uestions seriously< going into great detail<

then the obect should be created anew since its properties allowthe possibility that it will lie. 6 proper obect will remain silent or

say that it does not know the answer to the control 'uestion.

6fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a

control 'uestion< it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a

clarifying 9uestion. The practitioner needs to ask the obect where

the information came from to find out the details that offer proof

of the information8s authenticity in the real world. The obect may

also be asked the same 'uestions more than once< pro9ided theyare reworded. The answers to reworded 'uestions must be

identical.

15+






Remember< the more important the nature of the

information and the more serious action it implies< the more effort

needs to be in9ested in 9erifying it in the real world since a

certain percentage of the information is bound to be incorrectdespite correct performance of information0related techni'ues.

APP0ICATIO! BAS')

O! I!%02'!CI!G P"SIO0OG"

There are three main elements that< with the help of the

phase< may influence the physiology in 9ery beneficial ways.

4irst< it is possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn howto influence physiology. !econd< the brain reacts more strongly to

sensations than to real e9ents. 4or eample< if running while in

the phase< the physical processes of the body would be consistent

with the processes occurring in the body of a person running in

reality? respiration accelerates< blood pressure increases< the

heartbeat 'uickens< and e9en blood flow to the feet becomes

greater. Third< while the practitioner eperiences profound

changes of consciousness in the phase< this is when all direct and

indirect forms of autosuggestion are most effecti9e.

/ot all influences on physiology are 1E effecti9e.

=owe9er< e9en without a guaranteed rate of success< the effort to

influence physiology is worthy of attention because ama>ing

results can be obtained. 6lways remember that achie9ing a good

result may re'uire repeated influence from the phase. 9en in the

physical world< medications re'uire repeated ingestion.&f the goal is to cure a disease< do not rely solely on the

phase. !ick persons must use the phase alongside treatment from

physicians. The more serious the illness< the more strongly this

rule applies.

Obtainin+ Information

The diagnosis of health problems may be performed with

the same techni'ues used for obtaining information. &t is also possible to learn methods to cure health problems< if such

methods eist. %oth of these possibilities apply to third parties

being helped by efforts in the phase. &nformation gathering is the

155






only pro9en way to influence the physiology of other people by

using the phase. 4or eample< it is possible to find a well0known

healer in the phase and ask about personal health problems or the

problems of a friend or family member. 6 clarified answer may be used in the assistance of traditional medical treatment.

Attention from )octors

4ind a doctor in the phase by using the techni'ue of

finding obects and ask the doctor to take eamine or treat a

known illness or other health problem. 4or eample< in case of

abdominal pains the doctor may palpate the belly< apply pressure

to 9arious points< and perform a special massage. 6ny actions are possible< including an operation. 6fter lea9ing the phase< the

practitioner will feel a positi9e result.

Takin+ medicines

The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in

reality since all actions occur in a highly modified state of

consciousness and are percei9ed directly. Obect locating

techni'ues may be used to find medications used to treat eisting

problems. &t is also possible to create self0made substances to

produce the desirable effect. 4or eample< in case of an acute

headache in reality< a practitioner may take a painkiller while in

the phase and its effect will be partially felt in the wakeful state.

)irect 'ffect

6n illness or problem may be directly affected by actionsin the phase. 4or eample< a sore throat may be warmed by

en9isioning a burning sensation in the throat or by mo9ing to a

hot location< like a sauna. &f a practitioner would like to increase

physical fleibility< then stretching in the phase will cause the

body to adust to the noneistent action by relaing and tensing

the corresponding tendons and muscles.

Pro+rammin+This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto0

training in the phase< which is more potent in the phase than

reality. 6 practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or

15-






aloud and< if possible< should imagine eperiencing the desired

result. 4or eample< if the aim is to get rid of depression< a

practitioner should attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase<

eperiencing it to the fullest etent possible. !imultaneously<silent repetition of a goal with complete understanding and

epectation that e9erything will be alright< that e9erything is

wonderful will undoubtedly produce the desired effect.

2seful e>periences

9erything with useful properties in reality should be

eperienced as useful in the phase since the body will react in

practically the same manner. 7seful eperiences may includeeercising< going to the gym< ha9ing a massage< taking mud or

salt baths< and eperiencing pleasant emotions.

Psycholo+y

Practicing phase0related techni'ues fa9orably affects the

psychology because it offers new opportunities and e9okes new

emotions. =owe9er< there are specific applications of the phase

that produce differing psychological effects. 4or eample< it is

possible to use the phase space as a bridge for dealing with

phobias by facilitating a setting where a practitioner may confront

and deal with certain fears. Farious complees may be defeated

in a similar manner. The use of a well0known techni'ue called re0

9isiting :recapitulation;< where a person re0eperiences ad9erse

e9ents while trying to relate to them in a new way< has been used

successfully in the phase.

Trainin+

6ny motor skills can be sharpened by using it in reality

and in the phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is

generated at the le9el of interaction between areas of the brain

that correspond to muscle action. &n the phase< wrestlers may

practice throws< karate fighters may practice punches and kicks<

and gymnasts may practice acrobatics. =a9ing enough time to practice these actions in the phase is another matter.

2!P&O7'! '%%'CTS

15(






People often approach the practice of 9arious phase states

with deep0rooted misconceptions about what can actually be

achie9ed through practice. 9erything listed in this section refersto these misconceptions. &t has not been pro9en that any of these

things is impossible@ howe9er< actions should be based on pro9en

and 9erified methods in order to a9oid making mistakes and

wasting time.

hysical eit/ &f the first eperience with the phase

phenomenon happens by accident< it is almost impossible not to

interpret it as a real separation of the soul from the body # a

physical eit. This is how the initial phase eperience really feels.,ith eperience it becomes easily noticeable that certain things in

reality do not match things in the phase< like the placement of

obects or furniture in the house where a phase is first

encountered.

/o actual physical eit from the body has e9er been

pro9en through scientific eperimentation and obser9ation. 4or

eample< in the phase< it is not possible to fly around to locations

in physical world< although it may seem so< the locations that are

eperienced are produced within the mind. /or is it possible to

pinch someone in the phase and then to find a bruise on the

person while in reality.

Other $orlds/ The phase space is similar to the physical

world< and a practitioner may be inclined to think that the soul has

left the body. !ometimes the phase takes on an absolutely

unnatural form. 6s a result< the practitioner may decide that a parallel world has been entered? the world beyond< the astral

plane< mental space< or the ether. 6lthough tra9el in the phase can

lead to many places< this does not mean that the phase allows

tra9el through or use of actual< alternate worlds. The practitioner

should be reasonable.

8evelop#ent of super-a"ilities/ &t is partially correct to

consider the practice of the phase as an etrasensory ability since

it is an actual de9elopment of etremely unusual skills that ha9ealways been considered mystical. Times ha9e changed< and the

phase should hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric< obscure

corners of knowledge.

153






There eists an unpro9en theory that the practice of the

phase can impart unusual abilities. ,hile literature is full of

references to this effect< these abilities ha9e not yet been pro9en

by anyone. The same applies to intentionally de9eloping unusualabilities in the phase. es< these may be trained while in the

phase< but this does not mean that training in the phase will yield

the same results in the real world. Practice should not be for the

sake of achie9ing super0abilities since there are many pro9en

applications that do translate to reality in 9aluable ways. %e

realistic.

2S' O% T' PAS' B" T' )ISAB0')

,hile practicing the phase may still be 9iewed by the

maority as entertainment or an element of self0de9elopment at

best< phase practice takes on a whole new meaning for the

physically disabled. 4or them< the phase may be the only place

where the handicaps of reality dissol9e and disabled practitioners

eperience a range of possibility greater than the life eperienced

in reality.

6 blind person will see again in the phase< e9en more

clearly than seeing people do in reality. !omeone who is

paraly>ed will be able walk< run< and also fly. 6 deaf person will

hear the murmur of streams and the chirping of birds. 4or the

disabled< the phase practice is a chance to disco9er new<

incomparable worlds free of physical limitation.

/aturally< there are some nuances that must beunderstood. 4irst< for eample< if a person was born blind< then

there is the 'uestion as to whether or not they would be able to

see in the phase the same way ordinary people see. =owe9er< this

issue has not been fully studied< and blind people should simply

carry out their own independent research. !econd< some types of

disabilities can negati9ely affect the practice of the phase states.

4or eample< people who ha9e gone blind ha9e greater difficultly

catching the intermediate state between sleep and wakefulnesssince< unlike seeing people< they may awaken without opening

their eyes to the perception of sound. Third< a purely

psychological disability plays an enormous negati9e role.

15






Psychologically disabled people ha9e a whole range of specific

beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them.

,hate9er the indi9idual issues< this particular area of

phase applications re'uires additional study. &t deser9essignificant attention because it is a 9alid tool for the rehabilitation

of the disabled. &t is workable< uni'ue< and etremely surprising

in terms of the eperiences that it offers.

T"PICA0 .ISTA3'S

('! 2SI!G APP0ICATIO!S

•6ttempting an applied use of the phase without reaching a

good depth. *eepening must always be performed before

applications are attempted.

•%eing so in9ol9ed in phase applications that AmaintainingB

techni'ues are forgotten.

•4orgetting to consider how to breathe when tra9eling through

Outer !pace or underwater< which may lead to asphyiation.

•"oncentrating on a certain obect while tra9eling through timeinstead of concentrating on time tra9el< which should be the focus

since it is the point of performing the applications.

•4orgetting techni'ues for AmaintainingB when animate obects

are encountered when these techni'ues must always be kept in

mind.

•6n inability to o9ercome fear during contact with deceased

people. This fear must be o9ercome once and it will ne9er

resurface again.

•Dimiting desires while practicing the phase. There is no limit

to desire within the phase.

•Dimiting the performance of certain actions< although there

are no customary norms of beha9ior in the phase< unless the

practitioner decides upon specific limits.

•,hile looking for information in the phase< attempting to

obtain knowledge which clearly eceeds the scope of thesubconscious mind.

•6pplying the techni'ue of obtaining information from

animate obects without knowing how to communicate with them.

1-






•4orgetting to check the ability of an obect to con9ey 9alid

knowledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if

it is not 9erified.

•4ailing to 9erify information in the phase before using it in

reality.

•4orgetting to 9erify serious information obtained in the phase

in reality before using it. Ferification absolutely must be

performed to a9oid using bad information in reality.

•6 single attempt to influence the physiology through the

phase. &n the maority of cases< results are gained through

repeated effort.•6n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase<

whereas it is compulsory to seek medical ad9ice.

• &nitially belie9ing that the phase is the eit of the soul from

the body< while this is easily refuted in practice.

•"oncentrating only on unpro9en applications< despite all the

e9idence out there that this is most likely a waste of time.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& *H

1uestions

1. ,hat are the three basic applications of the phaseJ

2. 6re pro9en practical phase applications accessible to any

practitionerJ

). ,hile in the phase< is it possible to actually tra9el through6fricaJ

+. &s it possible to walk on the moon in the phaseJ

5. &s it possible< while in the phase< to appear at the time of

the arth8s creationJ

-. &n the phase< is it possible to appear in the magical world

behind the looking glassJ

(. ,hich relati9es can be met in the phaseJ

3. &s it possible to meet and talk to your fa9orite actor in the phaseJ

. ,here can one reali>e any cherished dreamJ

1. "an a practitioner appear in the computer game 8oo#J

1-1






11. "an a musician use the phase for creati9e purposesJ

12. *oes the practicing the phase influence a person8s

imaginationJ

1). ,hat most probably go9erns the phase spaceJ1+. ,hat kind of information is obtainable in the phaseJ

15. ,hile in the phase< is it possible to find out where the lost

key to an apartment is locatedJ

1-. ,hat kind of people can disco9er where treasure is hidden

in the phaseJ

1(. !hould any information obtained in the phase be construed

as accurateJ

13. !hould information obtained in the phase be 9erified afterwaking up< e9en if it8s already 9erified in the phaseJ

1. !hould obtaining information occur before deepening has

been performedJ

2. To obtain information while using the animate obects

techni'ue< who should be talked to if the goal is it to find out

the thoughts of a boss at workJ

21. =ow might information from an animate obect be

obtainedJ

22. "an an inscription on a wall be used as an inanimate

source of informationJ

2). &s it possible to use the episode techni'ue to learn where

one has lost the key to one8s apartmentJ

2+. !hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a

disease through phase practiceJ

25. 6re results from influencing physiology in the phasealways 1E guaranteedJ

2-. ,hat phase techni'ues might be used to influence the

bodies of other peopleJ

2(. &s it possible to obtain information that can be used to

influence the body and its functionsJ

23. &s it possible to take a well0known painkiller in the phase

and feel its effects on eitJ

2. &s it possible to use autosuggestion in the phaseJ). "an athletes use the phase to de9elop their skillsJ

)1. &s it realistic to epect to the soul will eit the body while

practicing the phaseJ

1-2








1-+






Part III

Au>iliary Information

Chapter ** , 2seful Tips

A P&AG.ATIC APP&OAC

The only sure way to get practice without unnecessarily

wasting time is to ha9e a pragmatic and rational approach to the

nature and possibilities of the phase phenomenon.

The maority of a9ailable information regarding

dissociati9e phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes ob9ious

during initial entries into the phase. This is why practice should

begin from the perspecti9e of a clean slate< using a logical bearing

in thinking? everything not confir#ed "y personal eperience

should "e ta%en $ith a grain of salt) This means only personal

eperience should be taken seriously< not the eperience of

ac'uaintances< authors< teachers< blogs< or forums.

To err is human@ thus< it is also human to pass on errors.

6s a result< many paradoical old wi9es8 tales concerning the

phase phenomenon ha9e become accepted a priori.

/ot e9erything written in esoteric literature should bethrown out. !ome things may possibly be drawn from it. 6fter

reading such literature< a practitioner should not assume that the

new knowledge is a uni9ersal truth.

4or a house to stand firm< it needs a solid foundation. The

only way to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach

the phenomenon in a down0to0earth manner< from a scientific

perspecti9e< discounting any purported supernatural phenomena.

Once a solid foundation has been established< e9eryone has theright to build their own truth on it.

I!)'P'!)'!T A!A0"SIS

1-5








of0body tra9el< or lucid dreaming. &n addition to disseminating

information< many books are often 9ehicles for disseminating

fallacies.

This is easy to recogni>e when researching se9eral such books and comparing described e9ents and theories. The

information is more often than not contradictory and based on

opinions that ha9e ne9er been 9erified by anyone< including the

authors. The result is a mass of speculation that has no bearing on

reality< nearly always accompanied by a false certainty about the

subect matter. =owe9er< unlike the real world< the phase is not a

place where one can belie9e one8s eyes or feelings. The phases8

appearance and 'ualities depend 9ery much on the personeperiencing it.

4or eample< if a practitioner belie9es upon entering the

phase the body will be lying nearby on the bed< then it will always

be there. &f a practitioner belie9es that the percei9ed body should

always be tethered to the physical body< then in the practitioner

will always see and e9en feel a tether in the phase. This is a

simple case of epectations becoming reality. !imilarly< someone

who has entered the phase by accident and thinks that the time of

death has arri9ed may see angels and a tunnel with a light at the

end. &f someone is etremely religious< there may be a perception

that something holy< e9en $od< has appeared. &f entry to the phase

is construed as a result of being abducted by aliens< then that is

eactly what will happen.

This would all be 'uite funny if it were not actually

encountered. ,hen it occurs< the only thing left to do is to belie9e. To belie9e< to tell others about it< and write books about

it...

There are authors who impart no illusions< but it is often

difficult for a no9ice to separate the truth from illusion or open

fabrication< which is why a skeptical approach to the contents of

any book is warranted. The only truth con9eyed in any book is

that which has been 9erified by personal eperience. The rest

should simply be noted and possibly taken into consideration.&n conclusion< books should be studied to disco9er

techni'ue0related information that allows a practitioner to enter

1-(






the phase and control the eperience. This is the only point of

intersection among all beliefs and theories.

P&ACTIC' '!7I&O!.'!T

!ince techni'ues used to enter the phase are associated

with a specific type of mental operation< it is necessary to create

comfortable conditions so that eternal distracters are kept to a

minimum. 6 room should neither be too cold or too hot< nor too

bright. Performing techni'ues at a comfortable temperature in a

darkened room or while wearing a sleeping mask are ways to

promote unhindered practice.&nterfering noises are often also maor distracters and

isolation from such noises is necessary to successful practice. &t is

often sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and

windows. &f this does not help< or if it is etremely loud outside

the window< one can use standard earmuffs.

&t is also helpful to gi9e ad9ance notice to people so that

they are not alarmed. &t is also preferable that no one is in the bed

with the practitioner. Most often< domestic animals interfere with

the performance of techni'ues< which is why they should be fed

beforehand and kept out of the room where direct or indirect

techni'ues are practiced.

TA03I!G (IT 0I3'-.I!)') P'OP0'

$reat benefit is deri9ed by discussing personaleperiences with other practitioners. This leads to an echange of

information< new knowledge< and mutual help concerning certain

problems and issues.

The greatest effect comes through communication in

person< and not solely through mail< forums< and blogs. Meeting

face0to0face with like0minded people promotes camaraderie and a

useful knowledgebase to consider during indi9idual practice.

*ue to the fact that knowledge of the phenomenon isunderde9eloped< difficulties may arise in finding someone to talk

to. This can be sol9ed by personally sharing phase eperiences

with friends and family members< regardless of whether they are

1-3






fellow practitioners. &t is e9en better to pass on training literature<

like this guidebook.

The website www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum

de9oted to the phase< making it possible to obtain and echange alarge amount of information. The site also has the contact

information for the coordinators of Phase Practitioner "lubs all

around the world< which is a non0commercial association of

enthusiasts who meet to echange and discuss eperiences.

T' &IGT (A" TO 3''P A EO2&!A0

Heeping a ournal can be of much help while learning and practicing the phase. ,hen properly kept< a ournal can help a

practitioner to de9elop an analysis that will increase the 'uality of

phase eperiences. %y and large< keeping a ournal helps to iron

out a sporadic practice< turning it into a structured discipline that

can be mastered.

6n effecti9e diary should contain a massi9e amount of

indicators that allow a statistical study to unco9er patterns. &t is

essential that each entry include the date< time of day or night< a

detailed account of entries into the phase and phase eperiences.

*escriptions of mistakes and a plan of action for the net phase

should also be recorded. *uring the no9ice stages of practice<

e9en noting unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. Dater on<

only successful phase eperiences may be recorded.

=ere is an eample of a proper ournal entry?

)ata$

7perience 4o) 12

January ;th , 2I

2/== M '>perience$

+ $o%e up early in the #orning) .fter eercising, +

too% a sho$er and ate "rea%fast) + $atched TG and read"oo%s until lunch)

+ laid do$n for a nap at 1 M, right after lunch) +

felt li%e perfor#ing indirect techni9ues, and affir#ed this

1-








Plan of action for ne>t time$

1) 8efinitely deepen the phase as #uch as possi"le) 2) +

should try to go through a $all) =) Translocate to #y

.untie in 4e$ (or%) ) Translocate to the Statue of i"ertyand ea#ine her cro$n) ;) Try to conduct the eperi#ent

of putting #y hand into #y head)

1(1






Chapter *5 , Practitioners '>periences

T' SIG!I%ICA!C'

O% OT'& P'OP0'S '4P'&I'!C'S

The ability to analy>e the eperiences of others can be a

great supplement to personal training. This allows a practitioner

to re9iew and think through situations that ha9e not yet been

personally encountered. The more a practitioner analyses the

eperiences of other practitioners< fewer mistakes will be made

during indi9idual practice.

Reading the eperiences contained in this section willshed much light on proper phase practice. The actions that these

practitioners took to achie9e results will be subconsciously

retained by the reader8s memory. Dater< these actions may

reproduce similar circumstances in the phase< affording 9aluable

opportunities to respond using proper actions.

6t the beginning stages of practice< many practitioners

lack in real descriptions of phase eperiences while techni'ue0

related knowledge abounds. Techni'ues can be conceptuali>ed inmany different ways< while descriptions of their application are

much more demonstrati9e. Thus< many practitioners ha9e no idea

about how genuine practice transpires.

The eperiences described in this section are useful 0 e9en

from a psychological point of 9iew. 9en if a person belie9es that

the phase phenomenon eists< it may be construed as etremely

difficult or personally impossible. 6fter learning about other

people8s eperiences< a person will reali>e that these practitionersha9e been able to enter the phase without any complicated or

incomprehensible techni'ues. The reader will understand that the

1(2






key is to take right actions at the right moment< trying to master

the phase with calmness and confidence.

,hile re9iewing and analy>ing other people8s eperiences

in this section< the reader should remember that these eperiencesare based on personal beliefs about the phenomenon< which is

why occult terminology and notions may be encountered.

=owe9er< such aspects of the descriptions are not important.

4ocus should be gi9en to techni'ue0related actions described in

the accounts. The reader should also take into account that some

nuances :like eperiential realism; are not always clear in the tet

and that it is not always possible to determine why certain e9ents

occurred in the phase eperiences described here.6ll of the following descriptions belong to real people

who either related the accounts orally< wrote them down during

classes at the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el< submitted them 9ia

email< or posted them on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the

total number of recorded< 9erifiable phase descriptions eceeds

one thousand< only se9eral cases that are illustrati9e and useful

for de9eloping analysis ha9e been selected. Primarily< these are

descriptions of the practitioners8 initial phase eperiences< which

are most rele9ant to new practitioners.

The large number of mistakes made by almost e9ery

practitioner< regardless of their le9el of eperience< should not be

taken too seriously while reading the comments. 6ctually< it is a

rare occasion that the phase is eperienced without any techni'ue0

related errors. 9erybody makes mistakes.

periments are listed in ascending order of 'uality andnumber of properly performed actions. 6ccounts ha9e been

published with the permission of the authors.

A!A0"SIS O% S'0'CT')

P&ACTITIO!'&SJ '4P'&I'!C'S

!o; *

Boris PronyakinCopy#riter; 3iev 2kraine

+ $o%e up in the &correct* state) + i##ediately felt

vi"rations, and "efore + had ti#e to ti#e to thin% a"out anything,

1()






+ $as %noc%ed out of #y "ody "y a strong %ic%) + started falling) +

had no vision, the floor $as gone) i%e a nose-diving airplane, +

$as in a free-fall) + %ept dropping faster and faster) + started to

feel that + $as losing control) The only thing + could do $asincrease the speed $ith $hich + fell, all of the $ays that occurred

to #e to try #aintain the phase that + atte#pted at that #o#ent

only lo$ered #y degree of a$areness) Touching did not do

anything for #e, as + $as 6ust an une#"odied spirit in a co#plete

vacuu#) Gision $as also #issing) + started to panic due to the

i##inent foul) But the acceleration of the fall did not help either,

and + $as flying and $aiting for the #o#ent $hen + $ould "e

thro$n out into the drea# $orld) .nd + dropped li%e this until + fell asleep)

1uestions$ *id %oris describe a direct or indirect

techni'ueJ ,hat could he ha9e done if no spontaneous separation

had occurredJ =ow could %oris ha9e more correctly used

deepening techni'uesJ ,hy wasnCt %oris thrown into a phase

episodeJ ,hy did he fall asleepJ

Ans#ers and Comments$ 6n indirect techni'ue was

employed. &f spontaneous separation had not occurred< %oris

could ha9e tried to separate on his own. &f an attempt to separate

had failed< it would be necessary to implement indirect techni'ues

by intensifying the 9ibrations< and then try once again to separate.

&n order to deepen and< meanwhile< reach a destination while

falling< %oris should ha9e applied translocation techni'ues and<

upon reaching a location< continued to deepen by means of

sensory amplification. 4or eample< he could ha9e applied thetechni'ue of translocation by teleportation with his eyes closed or

simply tried to catch sight of his hands through the darkness<

which also would ha9e induced an eit.

%oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears.

&t could ha9e been used for the techni'ue of listening in< which

would ha9e helped him to deepen and maintain. The lack of a set

aim to land somewhere resulted in his endless fall< though it does

not always happen this way. %oris fell asleep due to his passi9ityand also because he forgot that falling asleep was a possibility<

though he did remember about the possibility of an inad9ertent

return to reality :a foul;.

1(+






!o; 5

Ale>ei Bakharev

'n+ineer; Sochi &ussiaThis $as the first ti#e that + #anaged to "eco#e

conscious $hile drea#ing) Before falling asleep, + concentrated

on the dar%ness "efore #y eyes and tried to re#ain consciousness

as long as + could) .ll of a sudden, + drea#t that + $as levitating

to the ceiling, $hich resulted in #y "eco#ing conscious that +

$as drea#ing) My phanto# "ody responded poorly to atte#pts to

control it, and si#ply hovered "eneath the ceiling) There $ere

t$o people sitting on the floor "elo$) They $ere loo%ing in #ydirection, "ut it see#ed that they did not see #e) .t this point +

$o%e up and felt so#e sort of tingling and itching in #y legs)1uestions$ ,hat factors led to the entry into the phase

through dream consciousnessJ ,hat needed to be done while

ho9ering about beneath the ceilingJ ,hy did the foul happen so

fastJ ,hat should ha9e been done immediately after returning to

the bodyJ

Ans#ers and Comments$ *ream consciousness occurred

due to the 6leei8s intent to concentrate on the space before his

eyes and his desire to remain conscious for as long as possible.

The process of becoming conscious was caused by the sensation

of flying while dreaming. 4lying almost always becomes an

anchor for dream consciousness. &mmediately after the phase

occurred< 6leei should ha9e started deepening. &nstead< he

simply ho9ered about and obser9ed. ,hile all the mo9ementsmay ha9e been difficult to perform< they should ha9e ne9ertheless

still been done 9ery acti9ely. 6s a result< lightness and a

deepening of the phase would ha9e ensued. =is inad9ertent eit

from the phase happened due to passi9ity< failure to deepen< and

non0compliance with the rules for maintaining the phase. 9en

upon returning to his body< 6leei should ha9e tried to separate

again.

!o; ?

)mitry .arkov

&adio .echanic; .osco# &ussia

1(5






My first ti#e $as the #ost terri"le event in #y life) + had

never eperienced such terror) +t happened in 8ece#"er, 1!!) +

$as falling asleep in #y "ed at ho#e) Suddenly, + heard so#eone

enter #y roo#, "ut + did not pay attention to the &intruder*)Then, t$o fe#ale hands gra""ed #e fro# "ehind, and $hile

pressing #y "elly, started to lift #y "ody up) + distinctly felt thin

fingers $ith long nails on #y "elly, "ut $as co#pletely paralyed

and a"solutely una"le #ove any part of #y "ody or put up any

%ind of resistance) + felt #y "ody go through the ceiling, "ut then

$as pulled still higher and higher)

+ got scared that this could "e death) + $as afraid not so

#uch of death as of the un%no$n) .ll of this happened so s$iftlythat + found #yself unprepared for such a crossover) + started to

pray) + as%ed @od to help #e free #yself and go "ac%) + panic%ed)

+ can3t say ho$ #any seconds #y forced levitation lasted or ho$

high + $as lifted a"ove #y house, "ut the #o#ent ca#e $hen +

instantly returned to #y "ed)1uestions$ ,as this entry into the phase deliberateJ ,hat

kind of techni'ue led to the phaseJ ,hat is the name for the

complete immobili>ation that *mitry encounteredJ ,hat should

he ha9e done in order to start mo9ingJ ,hy did his body easily

go through the ceilingJ ,hy was he able to stop this terrible

eperience by prayingJ ,hat could he ha9e done immediately

upon returning to his bodyJAns#ers and Comments$ This phase eperience was

spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni'ues

since there was no significant lapse into sleep. The wholeeperience was accompanied by sleep paralysis< which is why it

was difficult for *mitry to do anything. &n order to mo9e in this

type of situation< it would ha9e been necessary to intensify the

phase state by using an indirect techni'ue or redouble efforts to

mo9e.p

*mitry8s body went through the ceiling without any

difficulty because there was no 9ision and the phase itself had not

been deepened< otherwise this would not ha9e happened so easily.Praying and appealing to $od helped in this case because praying

facilitated a relaation of perceptions and an intention to go back

to reality? two factors which are crucial during emergency return

1(-








Ans#ers and Comments$ 7pon awakening in a state of

sleep paralysis< &9an understood that he could use this opportunity

for the phase and immediately started attempts to separate without

employing techni'ues for creating the state< as they would ha9e been superfluous. This was an indirect techni'ue by nature. =e

could ha9e followed his impulse to le9itate from the 9ery

beginning instead of mo9ing his hands. 6fter his hand started to

mo9e< he could ha9e stood up or separated. &nstead< &9an simply

rolled o9er and calmed down for an instant< although doing so is

strongly discouraged and is a waste of the progress made up to

this point. Then< after starting to le9itate< he should ha9e< first of

all< assumed a position distinct from that of his real body< stoodup on the floor< and immediately started deepening. &nstead< he

di9erted his attention to the light source and an attempt to go

through the door.

9en if e9erything had been done correctly from the

beginning< there would ha9e been no reason to attempt to go

through the door. &9an could ha9e simply opened it. The skill of

going through obects should be learned after first fine0tuning the

ability to deepen and maintain the phase. There was no reason to

return out of fear< but e9en a return to the body< another

immediate attempt at separating would most likely ha9e been

successful.

The use of the term of Aastral handB indicates that the

practitioner harbors esoteric 9iews on the subect.

!o; <!atalya 3o=henova

'n+ineer; Shchelkovo &ussia

:hen + $as a"out 1L or 1I years old, + read so#e esoteric

articles on astral pro6ection) They see#ed 9uite interesting to #e,

"ut no #ore than a curiosity N + did not particularly "elieve in

such things)

One evening, + $ent to "ed as usual) + $o%e up in the

#iddle of the night, "ut $as una"le to #ove #y "ody and there$as a loud noise in #y head) 5aving "een re#inded of those

articles, + si#ply tried to levitate and + #anaged to do so, as if

through #y forehead so#eho$) The sensation of flying $as very

1(3






realistic, to #y great surprise) The first thought that occurred to

#e $as, :o$, these astral guys $eren3t lying* + hovered a"ove

#y "ody for so#e ti#e in the dar%) + thought of vision, and it

started to appear) + then fle$ to$ards the $indo$, and uponturning around in to face #y "ody, + sa$ it in its proper place) +

decided to fly "ac% to it and touch it) :hen + finally po%ed it, it

suc%ed #y "ac% into it, causing a 9uite strange sensation)1uestions$ ,hat type of techni'ue did /atalya useJ ,hat

would she ha9e needed to do if her attempt at le9itating had been

unsuccessfulJ ,hy was the phase short0li9edJ ,hat should she

ha9e done upon returning to her bodyJ ,hy did she use the term

AastralBJ ,ere the articles about astral proection of anysignificant helpJ

Ans#ers and Comments$ 7pon awakening in a state of a

sleep paralysis< /atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing

indirect techni'ues. !he managed to separate immediately< but if

she8d encountered problems in doing so< she could ha9e started

the techni'ue of listening in to the AnoiseB in her head. The phase

was short0li9ed due to a lack of acti9ity and failure to perform

deepening and AmaintainingB techni'ues. 6fter returning to her

body< she should ha9e tried to immediately separate.

/atalya holds esoteric 9iews on the nature of the phase

phenomenon< which is why she uses such terminology for it.

=owe9er< the articles helped her to perform the right actions at

the right moment.

!o Ale>ander %urmenkov

Student; Saint Petersbur+ &ussia

+ $o%e up at early in the night after so#e difficulties $ith

falling asleep) Blurred i#ages started to float "efore #y eyes and

+ realied that + could enter the phase) + started to discard

unnecessary i#ages, and after getting ahold of one of the#, +

e#erged in so#e %ind of a yello$ corridor) The level of general

realness and a$areness of the eperience $as a"out I< to !<of that of reality) + re#e#"ered a"out the #ethods for deepening,

$hich is $hy + started to loo% at everything going on around #e,

"ut this did not yield any serious results) + started to touch #yself,

1(








a"out $hat + $as still doing $rong $hile o"serving interesting

i#ages that #y i#agination $as dra$ing) But at one fine

#o#ent, + suddenly felt the pheno#enon that is co##only

referred to as vi"rations) + started to intensify the# C+ should addthat the feeling is indescri"a"le0, "ut + could not levitate, though +

really $anted to ta%e a loo% at #yself fro# the outside) + decided

to si#ply stand up, and that3s $hen it all "eca#e #ost

interesting The entire process of transitioning fro# a horiontal

position to a vertical one $as acco#panied "y increasingly

palpa"le vi"rations and a louder and louder roaring sound in #y

head) The sensation $as the sa#e as that eperienced after going

to "ed after not having slept for 2 hours and then "eing suddenlyroused "y so#e"ody/ #y head spun, everything started crac%ling

inside of it, and + $as a"out to lose consciousness) Then, a

flic%ering picture started to appear) +t sta"ilied after one or t$o

seconds, the roaring in #y head died do$n, and + realied that +

$as sitting on #y "ed)

+ $as in #y apart#ent, thought it $as noticea"ly altered)

My roo# see#ed #ore or less the sa#e, though the interior $as

indeed different upon detailed ea#ination) For ea#ple, #y

#o"ile phone, $hich is al$ays $ithin a reach, $as so#eho$ an

older and different #odel) +t turned out to "e the first o"6ect that +

tested, as + suddenly $anted very #uch to find out $hat ti#e it

$as and chec% $hich day of the #onth it $as) + distinctly felt the

phone in #y hand, "ut upon atte#pting to concentrate on and

loo% at the display, + $as thro$n "ac% into the reality) +

i##ediately cli#"ed "ac% out of #y "ody and decided to si#ply pace around the apart#ent $hile trying to re#e#"er $hat +

could eperi#ent on) + tried to con6ure an o"6ect, "ut that didn3t

$or% and resulted in so#e #ental activity) This caused the phase

to fade and #y "eing thro$n "ac% into reality) +n total, there $ere

a"out five successive entries into the phase that lasted for 2 to =

#inutes each) The eperiences $ere not sta"le at all, $hich is

$hy + $as ea#ining #y surroundings in a hurry, al$ays trying

to get ahold of anything + could get #y hand on) 5o$ever, there$ere a good a#ount of i#pressions, considering that it $as #y

first entry)

131






1uestions$ ,hat type of techni'ue did Roman use to

enter the phaseJ ,hat were the key precursors of the phaseJ

,hich separation techni'ue was usedJ &f Roman had failed to

completely separate< what techni'ue< besides 9ibrations< shouldhe ha9e consideredJ ,hat is the most likely reason for all of the

foulsJ ,hich single action allowed the practitioner to make the

phase fi9e times longerJAns#ers and Comments$ The phase was entered through

a direct techni'ue< with the comfortable position that Roman was

lying in being the main catalyst. 6s long as Roman was lying in

an uncomfortable position< his mind was unable to completely

turn off physical perception< and this was most likely the reasonwhy there were no short lapses in dreaming. &f Roman were still

unable to separate when using the techni'ue of standing up< or

any other techni'ue besides intensifying the 9ibrations< he could

ha9e tried listening in< as there was some noise.

&nstead of using his first phase eperience to work on

mastering the basic skills of deepening and maintaining< Roman

immediately indulged in comple eperiments< which is why his

multiple entries within the same phase were brief< of poor 'uality<

and not used effecti9ely. %ut this is all typical during initial

eperiences and a lot was still accomplished< especially

considering that a direct techni'ue was used. The relati9e length

of the phase was achie9ed mainly thanks to complying with the

single way to maintain the phase # repeated separation< which

Roman managed to do fi9e times.

!o; D

Ale>ander )yrenkov

Student; .osco# &ussia

My first entry happened at night) + $as lying in "ed and

thin%ing a"out the phase, as + had "een una"le to fall asleep for a

$hile) + doed off for a #o#ent and then a$o%e again, this ti#e

already in the proper state, and then easily rolled out C#ore or

less unconsciously and refleively0) + $ent deeper "y #eans oftouching and then falling headfirst) +t is a pity that +3ve already

forgotten a lot of the eperience, "ut + do re#e#"er that after

deepening + fell right do$n onto the yard of #y grand#other3s

132






house, "ut then lost consciousness, and so + returned into #y

"ody and rolled out of it several ti#es) + $as una"le to sharpen

all #y senses/ :hen + deepened one sense Ctouch, for ea#ple0,

another Ci)e) sight0 $ould fade a$ay) .fter that, + have a gap in#y #e#ory concerning #y travels Cconsciousness and lucidity

$ere $ea%, and + fell asleep and &resurfaced* several ti#es0, "ut

+ re#e#"er having "een to a lot of places)

5eres ho$ the episode ended/ + dove headfirst into $ater

fro# a high "oard Cafter first having deepened a "it0, and then #y

sense of touch gre$ sharper/ + felt &$ater* and hit #y head

against a very soft &"otto#)* + resu#ed the interrupted fall

through $illpo$er, "ut then it occurred to #e that #y grand#other $anted to $a%e #e up) My level of a$areness $as

not 9uite ade9uate, as it did not occur to #e that + $as actually

sleeping in a dor#itory, and not at #y grand#others house)

That3s $hy + decided that + needed to return to #y "ody) . sharp

fall occurred right after that thought, and $as follo$ed "y

sensations si#ilar to those one eperiences $hen hung-over)

1uestions$ ,as a direct or indirect techni'ue appliedJ

,hat made the implementation of the techni'ue successfulJ ,hy

was 6leander eected into his grandmotherCs yardJ ,hile

deepening< how could the problem of the senses being enhanced

only one at a time ha9e been sol9edJ ,hy did the practitioner

ha9e gaps in his memoryJ ,hat were the main problems

associated with maintaining the phaseJAns#ers and Comments$ *espite the brief lapse in

consciousness< the techni'ue used was a direct one< and that 9erylapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state<

e9en though this was 6leander8s first eperience. The eection

into his grandmotherCs yard was spontaneous< and was most likely

caused by some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a

habit of going there. 7nepected translocation often occurs when

deepening while falling headfirst.

Nuite possibly< in order to a9oid ha9ing the senses of sight

and touch enhance only one at a time< he should ha9esimultaneously applied the techni'ues of touching and looking

out. 6s for maintaining the phase< there were three main problems

that were also direct causes of the gaps in 6leanderCs memory?

13)






little depth< lack of a clear plan of action< and non0compliance

with the rules for maintaining the phase :with the eception of

multiple entries after return to the body;.

!o; F

Svyatoslav Baranov

Student; Perm &ussia

+ $o%e up on #y side) + didn3t feel li%e sleeping any#ore,

"ut + closed #y eyes any$ay) :hen + lay do$n on #y "ac%, +

i##ediately felt the sensation that + $as a"out to fall fro# the

couch C+ $as lying on the edge0, and so#e %ind of lapse occurred,

as if + $as "eing pulled so#e$here) + lay do$n once again, andthis "uing started, and a green light appeared "efore #y eyes) +

lay "ac% even further, and #y eyelids started to flutter) + thought

that + #ight fall fro# the couch at that #o#ent, "ut then #y

vision ca#e to #e, and + o"served that + $as already lying on the

floor net to the couch + got up on #y feet and noticed that the

roo# $as &spinning* as if + $ere drun%, "ut everything 9uite

9uic%ly $ent "ac% to nor#al) .t that very #o#ent, + understood

that this $as it The phase itself

+n ecstasy, + forgot a"out all the techni9ues and $ent to

loo% a"out the roo#) 7verything $as 6ust li%e in reality, "ut so#e

things $ere out of place) + tried to levitate and "ent "ac%$ards,

and $as so#eho$ thrust outside) +t $as dus% out there, and there

$as a lot of sno$ on the ground) + $ent around the house and

tried to levitate) + $as a"le to soar up$ards, and sa$ the horion

and sunset) But then + "egan to lose altitude) .fter having flo$nto the $indo$ on the other side of the house, + $anted to go up to

the roof, "ut then a foul occurred) +n a fraction of a second, + had

the sensation that + $as &no$here*) But then, #y real eyes

opened C$ith difficulty0 and there $as once again the feeling of

so#e sort of lapse) .$areness $as di# during the phase,

apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep)

1uestions$ ,hat kind of phase entrance techni'ue did

!9yatosla9 useJ ,hich specific techni'ue produced resultsJ,hich separation techni'ue was employedJ &f separation was

unsuccessful< which techni'ue should ha9e been immediately

usedJ ,hich important actions did he not perform enough after

13+






entering the phaseJ ,hat should ha9e been done after the foulJ

,hy was awareness dim during the phaseJAns#ers and Commentary$ 6n indirect techni'ue was

employed. /o phase state creation techni'ues were employed by!9yatosla9. &nstead< separation immediately worked through

rolling backwards. &f separation were unsuccessful< he should

ha9e proceeded with obser9ing images< which would ha9e been

possible with the green light.

*eepening was not immediately performed< no effort was

made to maintain< and there was no approimation of a plan of

action@ howe9er< this is not a crucial factor during initial

eperiences. 6nother attempt to enter the phase should ha9e beenmade upon returning to the body< but this was also forgotten.

6wareness was dim and memory was weak during the phase

because of the initial shallowness of the state< which was reflected

in the perception of the surrounding and also the thought

processes.

!o; *H

Ole+ Sushchenko

Sportsman; .osco# &ussia

ast night + spent a"out an hour developing the interplay

of i#ages in #y #ind after + no left felt any feeling of %inesthetic

sense) + $as lying on #y "ac% in an unco#forta"le position) .fter

sliding to$ards sleep for so#e ti#e, + felt slight vi"rations and

echoes of sounds fro# the drea# $orld, "ut the unco#forta"le

position still hindered #e) +n the end, + thought the hec% $ith it,and decided to lie do$n ho$ever $as co#forta"le, and turned

over to lie on #y sto#ach) 8espite the fact that the #ove#ent

upset the process, after a"out five #inutes the state "egan to

return and "uild up) + $as a"le to get a little vi"ration this ti#e,

although + $as una"le to a#plify it) + dre$ a picture of #y

%itchen in #y #ind, and "ecause the i#ages in that state $ere

really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so#e ti#e + understood

that not only $ere #y attention and a$areness there, "ut so $ere#y "odily sensations) + $as 9uite surprised that the phase had

"een so easy to fall in to Cthere $as no dou"t that this $as the

phase0)

135






+ 6u#ped out through the $indo$ and "egan to fly around

the courtyard) .ctually, it $as the first ti#e that + had flo$n only

upon a single #ental co##and, $ithout any physical effort, as

occurs during drea#s) The courtyard "ore only 1< si#ilarity toits real-life counterpart, "ut + $as not at all surprised "y this, and

+ si#ply en6oyed it as #uch as + could, as + $as a"le see and $as

not i##ediately thro$n out) But, after having loo%ed at and ta%en

in the city, the thought of $hether or not this $as the phase and

not 6ust a lucid drea# occurred) + $as so conscious in the drea#

that + $as a"le to %no$ a"out and co#prehend such ter#s, and

differentiate "et$een the# - can you i#agineH + have to add that

+ gave little attention to #y #e#ory, so + can3t say ho$ #uch of#y &self-a$areness* $as there, "ut + $as a$are enough to "e

a"le to differentiate "et$een the phase and a lucid drea# Cor at

least thin% a"out the difference0) + even $ent and as%ed people

around if it $as the phase or a lucid drea#) Sounds funny,

doesnt itH The funniest thing $as that they ans$ered that it $as a

different $orld, and they refused to discuss the topic any further

$ith #e) Then, + decided to not get #y #ind all #ied up and 6ust

go $ith the plot, $hich turned out to "e 9uite long and

uninterrupted + recalled a #o#ent fro# the day "efore ho$ +

had lain do$n and induced the phase $hile lying on #y "ac%, and

ho$ + had turned over and flo$n a$ay) + recalled all this

periodically during the course of the phase, and realied that +

should try to as% a"out $hat had "een going on $ith #e on the

foru# later)

Then, later in the phase, + found #yself in a "ase#ent) .sthere $as 6ust a really nasty s#ell there, + decided that + had

already had enough and that it $as ti#e to go "ac%) That

happened even #ore easily, as soon as + thought a"out going

"ac%, a vi"ration as light as a "reee $ent through #e and then +

$as "ac% in #y "ody $ith full a$areness and a $ell-rested "ody

and #ind) + $as co#pletely refreshed .nd that3s despite the fact

that + re#e#"er everything, every second of the drea#, fro# the

#o#ent + started flying1uestions$ ,hich type of techni'ue helped Oleg enter the

phaseJ ,hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase<

and could this ha9e had a positi9e effect on later resultsJ ,hat

13-






can be said of techni'ues related to 9ibrations in the contet of

OlegCs entry into the phaseJ ,hich specific techni'ue brought

him into the phaseJ ,hich initial actions should ha9e been taken

upon entry into the phaseJ ,hat was lacking that could ha9e leadto producti9e use of the phaseJ ,as it worthwhile to immediately

translocate by umping through the windowJ ,hat was the cause

of reflection on whether the eperience was the phase or a

conscious dreamJ ,as it beneficial to try to offhandedly learn

from obects what type of state this wasJ ,hy did the desire to

return back to the body arise< and what could ha9e caused itJAns#ers and Commentary$ Oleg entered the phase using

a direct techni'ue. =e was initially unable to enter due to theuncomfortable position that he had assumed< although lapses in

consciousness into short dreams did occur. /e9ertheless< the

initially unsuccessful techni'ue still ended in a positi9e final

outcome because the state that Oleg was in was close to the

phase. =owe9er< attention should not ha9e been gi9en to 9ibration

amplification techni'ues< especially straining the brain and

straining the body without using muscles< as they can be

detrimental during direct techni'ues.

The techni'ue of 9isuali>ation was used immediately

before entering the phase instead of obser9ing images< which is

used more often. Oleg deliberately conured the obser9ed images

instead of searching for them in front of himself< which is where

the difference between the techni'ues lies. =owe9er< he did not

perform deepening upon entering the phase. 6dditionally< he had

no clear plan of action to ensure that the phase would be producti9e !tarting to translocate by umping through windows

should only be done by those with a certain amount of eperience

since beginners sometimes percei9e reality to be the phase< or the

phase to be reality.

The reason for the reflection on the nature of the

phenomenon was due to terminological confusion< which is 'uite

widespread. &f a practitioner is aware but does not feel the body as

in the physical world< then it can be assumed that the phase has been entered. This is why there was no reason to in'uire about

this among animate obects.

13(






*eliberately returning to the body was a big mistake.

There was no reason to throw away an opportunity to tra9el and

use the phase. %eginners are not often afforded such an

opportunity. The reason for the return to the body in this case ismost likely found in the absence of a plan of action and lack of

clear understanding of how the phase might be used for practical

aims.

!o; **

Ale>ander 0elekov

Computer Pro+rammer; Saint Petersbur+ &ussia

+ tried all night to use the .stral ?atapult that cues you$hen you3re drea#ing, "ut + gave up on the idea after several

unsuccessful a$a%enings and si#ply fell asleep) :hen +#

drea#ing + usually #ove "y ta%ing great leaps, #uch further than

a %angaroo, a"out 1-= yards) This happens regularly in #y

drea#s, and + usually i##ediately realie that +# in a drea#)

8uring one of the leaps, + realied $hile air"orne that + $as

drea#ing and also realied that + $as a"le to land in a s#all

dirty pond) .s epected, + landed right in the pond and $ent deep

under the $ater) .nd at that very #o#ent, + found #yself in the

stencil, $ith #y hands and head half stuc% in it)

+ got a little nervous that this atte#pt $ould also "e

unsuccessful, and so + i##ediately tried to separate fro# #y

"ody) + $as una"le to get #y head or hands out, and for the first

ti#e + tried to turn around round #y ais and #anaged to get out)

Then + either slipped do$n or fell fro# the "ed, "ut + did not feelany pain) + cra$led for 1-2 #eters and then felt that + could go

"ac%) + started to touch the rug and so#e other thing, though +

don3t %no$ eactly $hat it $as as it $as dar%, and, lo and

"ehold/ $ithin 2-= seconds + pro"a"ly felt $hat s#all %ittens

feel $hen their eyes open for the first ti#e) 7verything $as foggy

and "lurry at first, "ut then a picture started to appear, the roo#

filled $ith light, and colors "eca#e "right and vivid) + tried very

hard to restrain #y ecite#ent, and, to #y surprise, $as a"le to) + $al%ed around #y apart#ent thin%ing a"out $hat +

should do) Realiing that + did not have that #uch ti#e, + decided

to tal% to an elderly #an $ho $ould ans$er #y 9uestions) +

133






decided that there $ould "e an o#niscient elderly #an "ehind the

apart#ents front door, $hich + $as a"out to open) .nd there he

$as, half-"ald, a"out K years old, in a grey coat $aiting for #e)

+ as%ed hi# the 9uestion, &:hat should + do to get into the phase#ore oftenH* But he started to tell #e a"out ho$ he $as raped as

a child) .nd to "e #ore precise, this $as already not an elderly

#an, "ut an elderly $o#an) + $as not very interested in hearing

her story, thus + tried to #ove a$ay fro# her, suggesting that $e

could tal% later) But the elderly $o#an $as persistent, and + did

not $ant to offend her, "ecause + thought that this $as an unusual

drea# $ith its o$n set of rules, and na#ely that once you have

as%ed an old $o#an a 9uestion, you are supposed to "ecourteous and listen to the entire ans$er)

+ $ent $ith her to the %itchen of #y apart#ent) The

telephone suddenly rang) + got scared that the telephone $as

ringing in #y apart#ent and $ould $a%e #e up, $hich is $hy +

i##ediately started to loo% at #y hand in order to #aintain) But

the sensations $ere 9uite sta"le, and + stopped doing that) Then,

#e and this lady $anted to coo% so#ething in #y %itchen) She

said that + could heat a frying pan $ithout gas) But + instead

decided to try the techni9ue of putting the hands together and

"lo$ing on the#, and returned "ac% into #y "ody)1uestions$ ,hich type of the entry into the phase did

6leander describeJ ,as the cueing program of any helpJ ,hich

type of anchor was the leapingJ ,hy was the onset of

consciousness immediately followed by a transition into the

stencil< i.e.< the real body< though not completelyJ ,hichseparation techni'ue helped him to get out of his body againJ

,hich techni'ue was used for deepeningJ ,hich techni'ue for

materiali>ing an obect was used correctlyJ ,hat should the

procedure for obtaining information ha9e been started withJ ,hat

importance does a polite attitude towards elderly women in the

phase ha9eJ ,hy was the return to body possibleJ ,hat did

6leander either forget to do or forget to record right after the

foulJAns#ers and Comments$ 6leander described an entry

into the phase through dream consciousness. %y and large< the

onset of consciousness was facilitated by prior work with the

13






cueing program< which< though it failed to yield results<

strengthened the necessary intention to enter the phase. The

leaping that accompanied the onset of consciousness may be

compared with the sensations of le9itation that often lead to practitioners achie9ing dream consciousness. !ince the techni'ues

for deepening and maintaining were not used at the moment of

dream consciousness< a return to the body< though partial<

naturally occurred.

4urthermore< 6leander managed to apply a separation

techni'ue that most resembled climbing out. =e then managed to

deepen correctly by means of touching and immediately felt a

result. *espite the lack of a plan of action< the practitionercompetently decided to do something useful and employed the

techni'ue of finding through a door in order to locate an animate

source of information. =e should ha9e first tried to test the subect

by asking special 'uestions to determine if the obect would be

able to pro9ide information :see "hapter 1;.

%eing polite to animate obects in the phase is the

prerogati9e of each person on an indi9idual basis< but it hardly

has any real basis. Most likely< the return to the body was

triggered by a failure to maintain< ecessi9e thinking< or

temporary passi9ity. 7pon eiting the phase< 6leander should

ha9e tried to immediately return. =owe9er< he failed to do so<

e9en though he had returned to the phase after eiting dream

consciousness. !uch a step should ha9e been ob9ious due to an

incomplete connection to the body.

!o; *5

Boris Bender

.ovie Technician '>perienced Practitioner of the Phase;

.osco# &ussia

+ "eca#e conscious in #y drea# al#ost i##ediately after

falling asleep) + $as in #y apart#ent standing in the corridor)

Being surprised "y having so suddenly found #yself in the phase,

+ started to touch the $alls $ith #y hands to test their fir#nessor, realness, as $ell as to intensify the phase "y touching) +

entered the roo#) There $as a "ed standing net to the $all, $ith

#y #other sleeping on it) + could not see her face, only her "ody

1






under the "lan%et) The roo# and corridor $ere eact replicas of

their real-life counterparts)

:hile thin%ing a"out #y sleeping #other, + suddenly

started to feel so#e$hat uneasy) :hen + approached the $indo$, + sa$ a grotes9ue landscape "ehind it that $as si#ilar to pictures

fro# #ovies a"out catastrophes/ a $asteland, houses in ruins,

odd pileups of "uilding #aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age,

craters fro# eplosions here and there, and + noticed hu#an

figures in so#e places)

Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that + $as ta%ing in a

panora#ic vie$ Cthe vie$ fro# the $indo$ spanned 1I degrees

and cut off at the horion, $hich is in fact al#ost eactly as thevie$ fro# #y apart#ent is in real life0, + turned "ac% into the

roo# and started to touch the $ardro"e, and then %nelt do$n to

touch the floor) .ll the $hile, #y fear had "een gro$ing stronger

and stronger/ "oth out of thin%ing a"out #y sleeping #other and

due to the vie$ fro# the $indo$) .niety turned into real fear

$ithin a #atter of several seconds, and then graduated into

terror and panic) + lost the a"ility to thin% critically) + had only

one thought/ + had to go "ac% to #y "ody) + darted "ac% to #y "ed

and suddenly found #yself lying on it) + closed #y eyes, "ut could

not understand if + $ere in #y real "ody or still in the phase) My

terror gre$ even stronger $hen + half-opened #y eyes and sa$

that #y #other $as getting up fro# her "ed) She loo%ed li%e a

character fro# a horror #ovie and apparently $as hostile to #e)

+ $anted to disappear, dissolve, and $a%e up + hectically

tried to recall the techni9ues for an e#ergency eit fro# the phase, "ut $ith poor results/ + tried to freee, rela and touch #y

fingers to #y toes in order to feel a connection $ith #y real "ody)

.t so#e #o#ents + felt li%e + had it, thin%ing, &The connection

had "een restored* + opened #y eyes, "ut realied that + $as still

in the phase $hen + sa$ that the roo# had changed, and $as no$

a$ash $ith gar"age)

The fact that the atte#pts %ept ending $ith false

a$a%enings $as driving #e cray) + $as especially shoc%ed $hen + got up after one of the false a$a%enings and sa$ #y #other

standing at #y "ed, still loo%ing threateningly at #e, li%e a

11






va#pire or a o#"ie fro# a horror #ovie) lus, she started to

reach out to$ard #e $ith her hands

+ nevertheless %ept on and tried to freee and $iggle #y

toes, this ti#e $ithout opening #y eyes, and not chec%ing $here +$as) + started to cal# do$n after so#e ti#e, "ut + $as una"le to

feel #y real "ody, $hich $as confir#ed "y the fact that sounds

$ere co#ing in fro# the phase/ + heard sparro$s chirping

outside the $indo$, though it reality it $as too late for sparro$s

to "e out) 5o$ever, the chirping and the associations that it

"rought Ci)e) day, $ar#th, sparro$s, and sun0, pro"a"ly helped

#e a lot and cal#ed #e do$n, as + finally #anaged to sense #y

real "ody and found #yself in reality) 4evertheless, after + got up, + i##ediately started to verify for a"out half a #inute that + $as

no longer in the phase "y touching o"6ects, #a%ing sure that they

$ere hard, and feeling all of #y "odily sensations)1uestions$ ,hy was there a risk that %oris could return to

his body when taking in the 9iew from the windowJ =ow could

%oris ha9e eamined the panoramic 9iew from the window

without worrying about a foulJ ,hich techni'ue for deepening

and AmaintainingB was employed se9eral timesJ ,hat would

ha9e happened if %oris translocated from the source of the fear to

another placeJ =ow could he ha9e o9ercome this problemJ ,hy

was %oris unable to easily eit the phase and why were all of the

techni'ues that he knew of no practical useJAns#ers and Comments$ ,hen eamining distant

obects in the phase< there is always a risk of returning to one8s

body because the acti9ity is relaing and relaation is detrimentalto the length of a phase. %oris could ha9e continued to take in the

9iew by simultaneously keeping up 9ibrations< periodically

eamining his hands< or rubbing them together. *uring the entire

length of %oris8s phase< he performed sensory amplification by

touching to deepen and maintain the phase.

&f he tried to run away from his mother to another place in

the phase< she probably would ha9e caught up with him there

anyway. =e should ha9e tried to yell at her in an aggressi9e tone.This would ha9e helped him to o9ercome his fear and either scare

the obect away or make it more agreeable. Problems with an

emergency eit from the phase arose because it was the beginning

12






of the night and the mind still needed to dream and< thus< kept

pulling him into that process.

!o; *?Ale>ei Teslenko

IT 'n+ineer '>perienced Practitioner of the Phase;

.osco# &ussia

.ctually, + $as not planning to travel that night, "ut $hen

+ $o%e up around #idnight + decided to try to enter the phase

nevertheless) + started to perfor# phanto# #ove#ents $ith #y

ar#s, "ut then a strong sleepy lethargy overca#e #e and +

suddenly $anted to give up #y atte#pts to enter the phase and si#ply fall asleep) 5o$ever, + $as persistent and continued to

perfor# phanto# #ove#ents $ith #y ar#s) +nstead of feeling the

usual vi"rations that occur $hen this techni9ue is perfor#ed, +

si#ply fell asleep and continued the phanto# #ove#ents $hile

drea#ing) Because of that, #y consciousness apparently did not

fall asleep co#pletely, and + "eca#e a$are that + $as drea#ing)

+ i##ediately cli#"ed out of #y "ody) There $as no

vision, conscious a$areness $as no #ore than ;<, so the phase

$as not that deep) +n order to #aintain the phase, + i##ediately

started chaotically touching everything around #e) +t helped)

Gision ca#e, though it $as #ur%y) + then found #yself in #y

apart#ent) + decided to strive to deepen) 7ach ti#e that +

eercised that techni9ue, the phase "eca#e deeper and deeper)

.fter + had achieved a sta"le phase, + decided that it $ould "e

good to gra" a snac% and headed for the fridge) + should add that + $as on a strict diet at the ti#e and $as craving so#ething s$eet

or fried) 5o$ever, $hen + opened the fridge, + $as 9uite

disappointed) There $as a lot of food in the fridge, "ut all of it

re9uired preparation Cra$ #eat, fish, dill, etc)0) 5o$ever, there

$as a "ottle of spar%ling #ineral $ater on a special lo$er shelf

in the fridge) :ithout giving it any thought, + too% the "ottle and

started to chug it)

.ll of the sensations $ere 6ust as in real life/ + felt the"u""les fro# the car"onation, that peculiar taste that #ineral

$ater has, and also ho$ the $ater $ent do$n #y throat) +n

general, everything $as 9uite realistic, though there $as no

1)






sensation of #y sto#ach filling up $ith $ater and, #oreover, the

$ater felt so#e$hat dry) +t sounds funny, "ut that very feeling of

$ater3s dryness spoiled #y overall i#pression so#e$hat) .fter a

foul, + realied that a possi"le reason for this #ight have "eendryness in the #outh of #y real "ody)

'sually, if there are, for ea#ple, candies in the %itchen or in the

fridge, + actually ta%e a handful of the# and consu#e the# $hile

traveling through the phase)

.fter going to the fridge, + $anted to see so#ething

interesting) + decided to e#ploy the techni9ue for creating o"6ects

and people, and so + closed #y eyes and focused on the i#age of

a girl $ho# + $anted to see at that very #o#ent) + affir#ed #ydesire, and + then opened #y eyes, concentrating on the area to

#y side) The air gre$ #isty at first, and then the person + $as

epecting #aterialied out of the air, and ca#e to life, see#ingly

fully autono#ous and $ith free $ill - she had the sa#e #anner of

spea%ing as in real life, and acted in the sa#e $ay) The foul

happened $hile #y conversation $ith the girl $as in full s$ingP

1uestions$ ,hich type of the techni'ue did 6leei

ultimately useJ ,hy did lethargy and drowsiness arise during

phantom wigglingJ ,hat should be done in this type of situationJ

,hat was most likely lacking when the indirect techni'ue was

performed< and why did the eperience end with 6leei falling

asleepJ ,hat techni'ues for deepening were usedJ ,hat could

ha9e been done to 'uickly fill the fridge with ready0to0eat foodJ

,hich techni'ue for finding an obect was used with regard to the

girlJ ,hat else could ha9e been used for the same purpose<considering 6leeiCs actionsJ ,hat should ha9e been done

immediately after the foulJ =ow many practical applications of

the phase did 6leei manage to tryJAns#ers and Comments$ The entry to the phase

happened because 6leei had become aware that he was

dreaming while he rightly tried to resist the sudden tiredness and

drowsiness o9er the course of the unsuccessful attempt with the

indirect techni'ue of phantom wiggling. 7sually< such drowsinesssignifies that a phase is approaching< signaling a need for

aggression< acti9eness and attention in order to o9ercome inertia

and enter the phase. =owe9er< attenti9eness was lacking< so

1+






6leei fell asleep. =owe9er< his desire to enter the phase was so

strong that the phantom wiggling continued e9en while he was

dreaming< causing him to eperience dream consciousness.

6mong techni'ues employed for deepening were sensoryamplification through touching and ogging. &t would ha9e been

sufficient to employ the techni'ue of finding through a door to

ensure that the fridge was properly stocked. 4or eample< 6leei

should ha9e closed the door on the refrigerator< focused his

attention on a full stock of snacks and food< and then opened the

door to disco9er that e9erything he8d en9isioned was there.

The techni'ue for finding an obect through

transformation was used to make the girl appear< but thistechni'ue should be considered only by eperienced practitioners

because it can lead to a foul in case of insufficient concentration.

%efore employing the techni'ue< 6leei shut his eyes< and only

then imagined the girl right in front of him. =e could ha9e

immediately created her using the techni'ue of closed eyes< which

usually is easier to do since there is no direct 9isual contact with

surroundings.

7pon returning to his body< he should ha9e tried to

separate again. 6ltogether< 6leei managed to and make progress

in two specific< applied tasks< though did not complete them

satisfactorily.

'4'&CIS'S %O& CAPT'& *5

Tasks

Try to assess the eperiences described abo9e using the rubric

below. The answers are located in the appendi.

<-Point System for Assessin+ the 1uality

of Out-of-Body '>periences 8Phases9

*eliberate entry into the phase using any techni'ue 1

The phase world was realistic or was made realistic 1Phase was of a9erage or abo9e0a9erage duration :2

minutes or more;

1

*eliberate use of the phase to work towards a specific 1

15






goal

*eliberately studying the phase or eperimenting with it

while in it.

1

&f there is some doubt any regarding any item< only half a pointshould be awarded.

1-






Chapter *? - Puttin+ a %ace on the

Phenomenon

ST'P'! 0AB'&G'

!tephen Da%erge was born in 1+( in

the 7nited !tates. 6t the age of 1< he

recei9ed a %achelor8s *egree in mathematics

from 6ri>ona !tate 7ni9ersity< after which he

enrolled as a graduate student in the

"hemistry program at !tanford 7ni9ersity. &n

1-< he took an academic lea9e of absence.

=e returned to !tanford in 1(( and began studying the human mind< including

subects related to dreaming. Da%erge recei9ed his Ph.*. in

psychophysiology in 13. =e founded the Ducidity &nstitute in

13(.

!tephen Da%erge has made the largest scientific

contribution to the study of phase states. &t suffices to say that

Da%erge was the first in the world to pro9e during a full0fledged

scientific eperiment that it is possible to become conscious whiledreaming This was done through logging specific signals made

with the eyes by a person dreaming while sleeping under

measurement instruments. These eperiments also pro9ed that eye

mo9ement in the physical body and percei9ed body are

synchronous.

ucid 8rea#ing < first published in 135< is Da%ergeCs

most well0known book. 7ploring the :orld of ucid 8rea#ing,

a book that Da%erge wrote with =oward Rheingold< was published in 1. &t was mainly thanks to the efforts of Da%erge

that mind0machines for achie9ing dream consciousness were

created< such as *reamDight< /o9a*reamer< and *reamMaker.

1(






The key feature of Da%erge8s work and achie9ements is an

absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon.

6rguably< he is one of the few authors and researchers totally

lacking in irrationality. 9erything that can be read and learnedfrom his books is 9erifiable and accessible for e9eryone< with no

peddling of out0of0this0world superpowers.

CA&0OS CASTA!')A

*ue to "arlos "astaneda8s desire to

follow the spiritual practice of the ,arrior8s

Path< which entails erasing one8s personalhistory< the details of his biography are

unclear. 6s far as "astaneda8s early years are

concerned< it can only be stated that he was

born outside of the 7nited !tates sometime

between 125 and 1)5. =e enrolled at the

7ni9ersity of "alifornia< Dos 6ngeles :7"D6; in the 1-s<

where he recei9ed a Ph.*. in anthropology on the basis of his

books.

"astaneda8s entire life path was de9oted to studying the

teachings of a certain Luan Matus or don Luan "achora. &t is more

than likely that his persona is a composite0image of an &ndian

!haman< a sorcerer< and an heir of the culture of the ancient

AToltecsB.

"astaneda wrote a do>en books@ howe9er< the book The

.rt of 8rea#ing :1); has the most to do with the phase state. &tcontains se9eral effecti9e techni'ues for entering the phase

through dream consciousness. =is subect matter is soaked in a

large amount of mysticism and 9irtually de9oid of any

pragmatism.

*espite the fact that the main orientation of "astaneda8s

work did not touch upon the phase state< he ne9ertheless became

one of the founding fathers of this field< as his general popularity

reached massi9e proportions worldwide."arlos "astaneda passed away in 13.

&OB'&T A; .O!&O'

13






Robert Monroe was born in the 7nited

!tates in 115. &n 1)(< he graduated from

Ohio !tate 7ni9ersity with a degree inngineering. =e worked for some time as a

radio program producer and director until he

established his own radio company in /ew

ork< which rapidly epanded.

&n 15-< his company also conducted a

study about the effect of sound wa9es on the

abilities of the mind.

&n 153< Monroe had an accidental personal eperiencewith the phase phenomenon< which strongly stoked his interest in

the subect to which he would de9ote his entire career. &n 1(+< he

founded the Monroe &nstitute< which was entirely de9oted to

studying unusual states of consciousness and the ability to

influence them through audio stimulation and other technologies.

One of its main achie9ements was the creation of the =emi0!ync

system< which was designed to help a person reach altered states

of consciousness< including out0of0body states< by synchroni>ing

the two hemispheres of the brain.

=is first book< Journeys Out of the Body< was published in

1(1. Two books then followed? Far Journeys :135; and

'lti#ate Journey :1+;.

Robert Monroe has< so far< made the largest contribution

toward populari>ing the phase state. =owe9er< he understood the

phase more as an actual eit of the mind from the body< which iswhy the term Aout0of0body eperienceB :O%; was introduced.

The book Journeys Out of the Body was such a massi9e success

that Monroe 'uickly became an undisputed authority in the field.

=owe9er< the large influence of mysticism on Monroe8s

work and 9iews cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent

after his second book. The maority of phenomena described in

the book ha9e not been 9erified in practice. The only attempt at

conducting a full0fledged scientific eperiment pro9ing that themind left the body was unsuccessful. &n the end< typical

misconceptions about the phase became widespread< as did

awareness of the eistence of out0of0body eperiences.

1






Robert Monroe passed away in 15.

PAT&ICIA GA&%I'0)

Patricia $arfield was born in 1)+ in the

7nited !tates. 4rom the age of 1+< she kept an

uninterrupted daily dream ournal that would

allow her and all of humanity great insight into

dreams phenomena associated with the phase.

!he was one of the founders of The

6ssociation for the !tudy of *reams. *r.

$arfield holds a Ph.*. in clinical psychology.!he is the author of a great number of books< with the

1(+ best0seller ?reative 8rea#ing being the most widely

lauded. &t was one of the first pieces of literature to approach the

phase state in a practical and non0specialist way< and recei9ed

worldwide interest and appreciation. The book contains good

practical guidelines and also describes the dreaming practices of

9arious cultures.

S"07A! .20)OO!

!yl9an Muldoon was born in the

7nited !tates in 1). =e is considered to be

the 6merican pioneer in the study of the

phase< although he used the esoteric term

astral . =e inad9ertently woke up in the phaseat the age of 12< where he saw a cord

connecting his percei9ed body to his real

body. Muldoon first thought that he was dying

during the eperience< although he e9entually

concluded that this was an instance of Aastral proectionB. =e had

repeated eperience with the phenomenon< but Muldoon was still

unable to become an ad9anced practitioner due to a lack of full

control o9er the practice.6fter coordinating efforts with =ereward "arrington< the

famous 6merican in9estigator of the unknown< the two published

the sensational< ointly authored book The ro6ection of the .stral

2






Body in 12. The authors published two other books? The ?ase

for .stral ro6ection :1)-; and The heno#ena of .stral

ro6ection :151;.

*espite a large ser9ing of esotericism< Muldoon8s books<:especially the first one; contain a lot of helpful< practical

information and eplanation of the most di9erse phenomena that

can occur during the phase. =owe9er< Muldoon is considered to

be the greatest populari>er of irrational esoteric terms and

theories< which subse'uently became 'uite widespread.

!yl9an Muldoon passed away in 1(1.

CA&0'S 0'A)B'AT'&

"harles Deadbeater was born in

ngland in 13+( :135+ according to some

sources;. 6fter dropping out of Oford due to

hard times< Deadbeater became an ordained

priest< but then became 'uite acti9e in the

occult. This led to his becoming a member ofthe Theosophical !ociety in 133). Deadbeater

became one of its most famous participants.

The combination of a bright mind<

scientific knowledge< and interest in the

paranormal led him to publish many books on many di9erse

topics. One of them< 8rea#s/ :hat They .re and 5o$ They .re

?aused :133;< was one of the first works to touch upon the

phenomenon of the phase. Deadbeater8s writing is saddled with aton of esoteric terms and theories. &n it< the term astral plane is

predominantly used for the phase. /e9ertheless< the book is not

without some helpful guidelines concerning techni'ues.

"harles Deadbeater passed away in 1)+.

&OB'&T B&2C'

Robert %ruce was born in ngland in 155. =e has performed his lifeCs work while li9ing in 6ustralia. 6fter studying

and promoting dissociati9e phenomena for many years< by the

beginning of the 21st century he had become one of the leading

21






authorities in the field. =e is also a specialist in many other

paranormal fields of study.

Robert %ruce wrote se9eral books< the most

important and well known of which is .stral 8yna#ics :1;. The author holds 'uite

open esoteric 9iews< which are 9ery strongly

reflected in his theories and terminology. The

helpful< practical guidelines in his books are

'uite often loaded with a large amount of

information that has not been 9erified or

pro9en by anyone. Robert %ruce is also a

propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes concerning the phase phenomenon.

&ICA&) ('BST'&

Richard ,ebster was born in /ew

Qealand< where he still resides.

=e is the author of about 5

publications that ha9e sold many millions of

copies around the world. =owe9er< only one

of them< .stral Travel for Beginners< is

completely de9oted to the phase state. The

book is saturated with widespread

misconceptions about the phase phenomenon and misguided

theories trying to eplain it. The techni'ue0related aspect of the

book is also presented ineffecti9ely.&t is 'uite likely that the author himself has no practical

eperience< which can also be said for the contents of his other

do>ens of books de9oted to 9arious topics.

CA&0'S TA&T

"harles Tart was born in the 7nited !tates in 1)(. =e

recei9ed his Ph. *. in psychology in 1-) at the 7ni9ersity of /orth "arolina. Tart also recei9ed training at !tanford 7ni9ersity.

=e was one of the founders of transpersonal psychology.

22






=e became one of the most preeminent

researchers of unusual states of awareness

after the publication of .ltered States of

?onsciousness :1-;< the first book that heworked on. &t was one of the first books to

eamine entering the phase through dream

consciousness. The book recei9ed

popularity when the use D!* and Mariuana

were often 9iewed as 9ehicles to ele9ated

consciousness< and the book e9en describes the use of chemical

substances in the contet of phase states.

2)






Chapter *@ , %inal Test

The 'uestions on the test may ha9e one or more correct

answers< or none of the answers may be correct. Thus< the

'uestions must be read completely through< and attention must be

paid to their implications and finer points.

6 student8s theoretical knowledge is considered to be

satisfactory if the correct answers to at least one0half of the

'uestions are gi9en. &f a score of less than 5E is recei9ed< a

student should study the weak points again or re0read the entire

guidebook. Otherwise< it is 'uite probable that fundamental

mistakes will be made< which will in turn interfere with indi9idual practice.

&f a score of at least 3E is achie9ed< then a theoretical

knowledge of the practice is at an ad9anced le9el< which will

surely ha9e a positi9e effect on the practitioner8s direct

eperiences in the phase.

6nswers are in the appendi at the end of the guidebook.

*; !oise and realistic ima+es une>pectedly arise #henperformin+ the indirect techni6ue of phantom #i++lin+; (hat

can be done/

6; "ontinue with phantom wiggling.

%; !witch to obser9ing images or listening in.

"; Try to do all or some of the techni'ues

simultaneously.

*; "hoose the techni'ue with the strongest precursors

and continue with that one.

2+






5; A practitioner unintentionally opens the eyes for several

seconds upon a#akenin+; (hat is the best #ay to start

indirect techni6ues from in this case/

6; 6ttempting to separate.%; The obser9ing images techni'ue.

"; The rapid eye mo9ement techni'ue.

*; The forced falling asleep techni'ue.

; &t8s best to not start any techni'ue and fall back to

sleep with the intention of reawakening and trying to do

e9erything again without first mo9ing.

?; (hich actions are preferable for performin+ a direct

techni6ue before fallin+ asleep for the ni+ht after a lon+

period of sleep deprivation or e>haustion/

6; Monotonously performing the obser9ing images

techni'ue.

%; %eing attenti9e and concentrating on actions.

"; The absence of a free0floating state of consciousness.

*; Nuickly alternating techni'ues.

; =igh0'uality relaation.

@; .ild vibrations occur #hen performin+ a direct techni6ue;

Can the strainin+ the brain techni6ue be used to amplify the

vibrations/

6; es.

%; /o.

"; &t may be used< but for practical purposes 0 onlywhen a practitioner is ehausted or sleep0depri9ed.

*;&t may be used< as long as the attempt to enter the

phase is not being made during the day

<; (hich of the actions +iven belo# increase the likelihood of

enterin+ the phase throu+h dream consciousness #hen used

ri+ht before fallin+ asleep/

6; Performing direct techni'ues.%; &ntending to perform indirect techni'ues upon

awakening.

"; Recalling dreams from the night before.

25






*; "reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance

to the phase in such a way.

; If a#areness occurs at the very last moment of a dream thatfades a#ay #hich of the actions +iven belo# should be

undertaken in order to enter the phase as soon as possible/

6; Try to fall asleep again in order to once again

become self0aware while dreaming.

%; &mmediately perform indirect techni'ues.

"; Take a break and perform direct techni'ues later.

*; !tart to recall that night8s dreams.

; (hich of these are most likely to produce a 6uick phase

entry #hen a#akenin+ in a state of sleep paralysis/

6; Relaation.

%; 4alling asleep with the intention of becoming self0

aware while in a dream.

"; Mo9ing the physical eyes and tongue.

*; *irect techni'ues.

D; (hat should be done #hen spontaneously thro#n from the

body #hile lyin+ do#n or #akin+ up in the middle of the

ni+ht/

6; Return to the body and perform appropriate

separation techni'ues.

%; &mplement a predetermined plan of action for the

phase."; *eepen immediately.

*; Try to 'uickly establish 9ision< if it is not already

present.

*; mploy the forced falling asleep techni'ue.

F; (hile tryin+ to enter the phase rollin+ out #orks at first

but only partially and the movement cannot be e>tended any

further no matter #hat effort is made; (hat is it best to do inthis situation/

6; Try to turn back and roll out further once again< and

repeat se9eral times.

2-








%; Tactile sensory amplification< feeling the sensation

of rubbing the hands together.

"; /o techni'ue.

*; The techni'ue of rotation.; Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase.

*@; In #hich situations is fallin+ asleep in the phase most

likely/

6; ,hen looking for a desired person.

%; ,hen communicating with animate obects.

"; ,hen completely calm< ha9ing completely halted all

acti9ity.*; ,hen tra9elling aimlessly.

; ,hen taking part in side e9ents.

*<; (hich of the follo#in+ indicators +uarantees that the

phase has been e>ited for reality/

6; 6 clock shows the right time< and the same time

e9en if a practitioner turns away from it and then looks at

it again.

%; !ensations are completely realistic.

"; The presence of friends or family in the room who

communicate with the practitioner.

*; 6n inner feeling that the phase has ended.

; /othing happens after staring at the end of a finger

from close distance for fi9e to 1 seconds.

*; In #hich situations should travellin+ in the phase be

deliberately discontinued/

6; ,hen a fear that a return will be impossible< or a

direct fear of death arises.

%; ,hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner

will be late for something in the physical world.

"; ,hen frightened by some strange e9ents or obects.

*; ,hen there is an ineplicable mortal fear ofsomething unknown or incomprehensible.

; &f someone in the phase strongly insists that the

practitioner should return to reality.

23






4; &f sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by

interaction with obects in the phase world.

*; (hat #ill most likely occur #hen tryin+ to evade somea#ful bein+ or dan+erous person/

6; The obect will get bored and stop.

%; 4ear of the obect will go away.

"; The phase will occur more fre'uently< as well as be

longer and deeper than usual.

*; The practitioner will become calmer and unner9ed

less fre'uently.

; The more fear there is< the more often the obect willchase the practitioner.

*D; (hen should establishin+ vision in the phase be

considered if it has not occurred on its o#n/

6; &mmediately upon separation without deepening.

%; &mmediately after deepening.

"; ,hile flying through dark space during

translocation.

*; 6fter fi9e to 1 seconds of being sure that a phase

entry has occurred.

; ,hen there is a desire to immediately eplore the

surroundings after separation has occurred.

*F; o# is it possible to pass throu+h a #all #hile standin+

close to it #ithout stoppin+ to look at it from close ran+e/6; %y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it<

and then the entire body and head.

%; %y gradually pushing the head through it at first< and

then the entire body.

"; %y trying to put a hole in it< and then epanding the

hole and climbing through it.

*; %y ramming it with a shoulder< trying to bring it

down.

5H; (hile in the phase a practitioner is in a situation #here

the arms are totally paraly=ed and immobili=ed; This happens

2








*; "reate a light switch in the room using the method of

finding an obect.

; "lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already

lit< and then open the eyes.

5@; (hen communicatin+ #ith an animate obect in the phase

a desire to add a specific person to the scenery arises; (hich

of the follo#in+ actions are advisable only for be+inners in

this case/

6; Propose going to a neighboring room where the

needed subect will be presented through the use of the

door or corner techni'ue.%; !ummon the needed person by calling their name

loudly.

"; Translocate back to the same place< and ha9e both

animate obects present there upon your return.

*; 6dd the needed person through the closed eyes

techni'ue.

; 6sk the animate obect that you are talking to if it

does not mind adding someone to the scenery.

5<; (here is one not allo#ed to +o usin+ translocation

techni6ues/

6; &nside a mammoth.

%; To the past or the future.

"; To hea9en.

*; To an episode of the mo9ie Star :ars.

5; o# #ill a deceased person differ from a prototype in the

phase #hen correctly performin+ the techni6ue for findin+

the person/

6; Only the practitioner himself can conure up

differences< or not see or percei9e them.

%; The deceased will ha9e a different timbre of 9oice.

"; There will be a radiant halo around the deceased8shead.

*; Physical perception of the deceased will be less

realistic than in real life.

211






; The deceased will not remember anything.

5; (hat difficulties can arise in the phase #hile obtainin+

information from animate sources of information/6; &nability to remember information obtained.

%; !ources of information are silent.

"; &nade'uateness of the sources of information.

*; !eual attraction< if the source of information is of

the opposite or desired se.

; %eing gi9en false information.

5D; o# mi+ht a practitioner accelerate the healin+ process of

a cold that is characteri=ed by a stuffy nose and a sore throat/

6; Maintaining and amplifying 9ibrations for the entire

length of the phase< and entering it o9er se9eral days in a

row.

%; Taking aspirin and entering the phase o9er se9eral

days in a row.

"; Tra9elling to hot places in the phase and entering it

o9er se9eral days in a row.

*; periencing stressful situations o9er se9eral phases.

; 4inding a doctor in the phase and asking him what it

is best to do in real0life or e9en in the phase itself.

5F; (hich of the follo#in+ achievements belon+ to Stephen

0aBer+e/

6; 4ounding the Ducidity &nstitute.%; 6 Ph.*. in anthropology.

"; !cientifically pro9ing that lucid dreaming is possible.

*; 6 Ph.*. in psychophysiology.

; Pro9ing that eye mo9ements in the phase and in

reality are synchroni>ed.

?H; (ho of approached the study of the phase state from a

pra+matic point-of-vie# that #as totally devoid of occultism/6; !tephen Da%erge

%; Robert Monroe

"; !yl9an Muldoon

212






*; "harles Deadbeater

; Patricia $arfield

4; "arlos "astaneda

21)








A!S('&S TO T' %I!A0 T'ST 8CAPT'& *@9

1. 6<%<"<*

@2. *@

). %< "< *@

+. "@

5. 6<%<"<*

@

-. %@

(. #

3. "@. 6< *< @

1. %< "@

11. 6<"<*<

@12. 6<*<6

*@

1). "@

1+. *< @

15. @

1-. %< 4@

1(. "< @

13. %< *@1. #

2. 6< "@

21. 6< %< *@

22. 6< "< *@2). @

2+. %@

25. #@

2-. 6@

2(. %<"<*<@

23. %<"<@

2. 6<"<*<@

). 6< @

A SI.P0I%I') )'SC&IPTIO! O% T' 'ASI'ST

.'TO) %O& '!T'&I!G T' PAS'

2SI!G I!)I&'CT T'C!I12'S

7pon awakening< without mo9ing or opening the eyes<

immediately try to separate from oneCs body. The separation

attempt should be carried out without any imagining< but rather

with the desire to make a real mo9ement without straining the

muscles :rolling out< le9itation< standing up< etc.;.

&f separation does not occur within three to fi9e seconds<

immediately try alternating se9eral of the most effecti9e

techni'ues for three to fi9e seconds each. ,hen one of thetechni'ues works< continue it for a longer period of time?

0Obser9ing images? Try to eamine and discern the

pictures arising before closed eyes.

0Distening in? 6ttempt to hear sounds in the head and

make these louder by listening in or strengthening the will@

0Rotating? &magine rotating around the head0to0foot ais@

0Phantom wiggling? Try to mo9e a part of the body

without straining the muscles< and try to increase the range ofmo9ement@

215






0!training the brain? Try straining the brain< which will

lead to 9ibrations that may also be intensified by straining the

brain.

6s soon as one techni'ue clearly starts to work< continuewith it as long as progress is apparent< and then try to separate. &f

separation fails< return to the techni'ue that was working.

*o not gi9e up alternating through techni'ues until one

minute has elapsed< but do not continue for more than two

minutes. !eparation from the body may be attempted periodically<

especially if interesting sensations occur.

TA3' PA&T I! &'S'A&C

Take part in the research of a techni'ue. The techni'ue of

imagined sensations is described in "hapter 2 in the section on

!econdary Techni'ues. This techni'ue is also commonly known

as the Acell phone techni'ueB. ,hile this guidebook was being

written< eperiments with this techni'ue were conducted at the

!chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el8s seminars. Results were

astounding. *ue to the fact that this techni'ue is easy to

understand and apply in practice< it could be the most

straightforward and effecti9e one for achie9ing the phase state.

6lmost e9ery second attempt made with this techni'ue has

yielded results< pro9ided it is employed as an indirect techni'ue.

*ue to this techni'ue8s huge potential for populari>ing

and spreading knowledge of the phenomenon< anyone who is

interested is in9ited to take part in a global eperiment of thetechni'ue8s effecti9eness. &n addition to testing it< a researcher

may propose the techni'ue to interested persons or post it on the

&nternet to increase the number of practitioners. Please submit the

results of your eperiments with the techni'ue to the e0mail

address? [email protected]

=ere it is?

T' C'00 PO!' T'C!I12'

21-


mailto:[email protected]






The practice of this phase entry techni'ue is to imagine

the sensation that something is resting in the hand< desirably upon

awakening without any physical mo9ement. &t is best to imagine a

cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 'uiteaccustomed to this sensation< although any other obect will do. &t

is necessary to acti9ely and attenti9ely focus on the sensations in

the palm of the hand. Most likely< the physical sensation of a

phone lying in the hand will 'uickly arise. The sensation will

become increasingly palpable. &f a sensation does not arise within

1 seconds< the techni'ue not going to work and it is time to

switch to another one.

,hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs< focuse9ery bit of attention on it. &t should be noted that this will not be

an imagined sensation< but a real one. This should be understood

from the 9ery beginning< and results should be epected. Once the

sensation is stable< start feeling the mobile phone with the fingers.

Physical sensations should be eperienced. The physical body< of

course< must not mo9e or strain. &f this does not work< only focus

attention on the sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to

feel the phone with the fingers later. &f feeling the phone with the

fingers is successful< acti9ely roll the phone around the hand<

feeling all of its details.

6s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in

the hand< separation from the body may be attempted. &n this case

it is usually easiest to separate by rolling out or standing up.

"ontinue to hold the phone and roll it around< which will maintain

the emerging phase state. !eparation in this case should be morelike actually getting up physically or rolling out of bed< rather

than actually separating one thing from something else. That is<

do this in the same way as physically getting out of bed< starting

from the sensation of the phone in the hand.

&f separation is unsuccessful< continue to attenti9ely feel

the phone in the hand for a little while longer and try to separate

again. &f separation happens< the net step is to take actions that

are typical for a phase eperience? deepening< and thenaccomplishing predetermined tasks while performing

AmaintainingB techni'ues. &f only a partial separation occurs< then

separation by force should be attempted.

21(






$enerally< the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises

with e9ery second attempt. 4urthermore< achie9ing success only

re'uires eperience and some deterity since feeling the sensation

of a phone in the hand signifies that the re'uired state has beenreached and subse'uent actions may be attempted.

ATT'!TIO!

,hen making attempts to enter the phase<

the practitioner should ha9e complete confidence that he will be

immediately successful in e9erything. 9en a shroud of doubt

will keep the practitioner in his body< this is especially true whenit comes to indirect techni'ues.

4our typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered

by E of practicioners?

1 0 4orgetting to deepen the phase

2 0 4orgetting to maintain the phase

) 0 6bsence of a plan of action when in the phase

+ 0 4orgetting to try to re0enter the phase after a foul

T' SCOO0 O% O2T-O%-BO)" T&A7'0

Michael Raduga8s !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el conductstraining seminars in many countries around the world. The

coursework allows students to master the phase phenomenon and

hone their skills at tra9eling in the phase. &nformation on eisting

213






branches and seminar schedules are a9ailable on the website

www.obe4u.com. ,e also welcome potential partners interested in

organi>ing !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el branches and seminars.

6ll correspondence regarding seminars< partnerships< and proposals related to the translation of this book may be handled

by e0mail at [email protected] .

B&I'% G0OSSA&" O% T'&.S A!)

)'%I!ITIO!S

Out-of-Body e>perience 8OB'9 lucid dreamin+ 80)9 astral ,

a number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state inwhich a person< while being fully conscious< reali>es

consciousness outside the normal range of physical perception.

ndirect techni6ues # entry into the phase within fi9e minutes of

awakening from sleep of any duration 0 pro9ided there has been

minimal physical mo9ement.)irect techni6ues # entry into the phase without any prior sleep<

after ecessi9e physical mo9ement upon awakening< or ha9ing been awake for at least fi9e minutes.)ream Consciousness # entry into the phase through becoming

consciously aware while a dream episode is happening.

)issociation # separation@ in this case< a scientific term

describing eperiences in the phase.Sleep paralysis # a stupor@ the complete immobili>ation that

often occurs when falling asleep< awakening< and entering or

eiting the phase.Stencil # the real physical body that is no longer percei9ed while

in the phase.

)eepenin+ the phase # methods for making the phase as realistic

as possible by stabili>ing the surrounding space..aintainin+ the phase # methods for maintaining the phase state

by pre9enting a lapse into sleep< a return to reality< or an imagined

return to reality.

&'. # rapid eye mo9ement sleep :RM phase;@ a sleep phasethat is characteri>ed by increased brain acti9ity that is

accompanied by rapid eye mo9ement and dreaming.

21










%oul # an inad9ertent termination of the phase through a

spontaneous return to e9eryday reality.Cycles of indirect techni6ues 00 the easiest way to enter the

phase< employed by rapidly alternating certain techni'ues uponawakening from sleep until one of them works.

22






20TI.AT' "OGA

T' T'C!O0OG" O%

T' 5H*5

T&A!S%O&.ATIO!

:%uy on www.obe+u.com;

The lines of this book will close out the life you ha9e led

thus far. ou ha9e in front of you a gap0closing< cutting0edge and

conscious0awareness raising technology that will allow you to

complete your transformation into the new era. &ts moderni>ed<

secular approach to these ancient technologies brings conscious

awareness outside of the physical world within e9eryoneCs reach.

Thanks to the de9elopment of simple technical

instruments< the practice of freeing oneCs conscious awareness

from the body opens up the widest0possible hori>ons and is the

most promising personal de9elopment technology in eistence. &

say this for the simple reason there is nothing more useful and pro9ocati9e out there. This is the long0awaited net step in human

e9olutionary de9elopment. The eplosi9e propagation of this

practice will also be the trigger for the 212 transformation.

Michael Raduga

Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel

Table of "ontents?

Chapter *

!uperpowers Made 6ccessible

Chapter 5

ntering the Out0of0%ody !tate

Chapter ?

Managing the Out0of0%ody perience

221






Chapter @

Practical 6pplications

Chapter <

The periences of %eginners

SCOO0 O% O2T-O%-BO)"-T&A7'0 II

P'&SO!A0 '4P'&I'!C'S

This book is the freestandin+ supplement to The School of

Out-of-Body Travel I – Practical uideboo"# It is intended to

+ive a first-hand demonstration of the out-of-body e>perience

in practice #hile brin+in+ attention to correct actions and

mistakes made #hen out-of-body;

:%uy on www.obe+u.com;

&t8s one thing to know which techni'ues can be used to

control and lea9e the perception of the body< but another thing to

actually know how to use those techni'ues. &t8s one thing to read

descriptions of a single indi9idual8s eperiences< but another to

learn about how a large number of other practitioners regard the

techni'ues and feel about them. /ot e9eryone is able to figure out

what eactly to do and how to do it without reading this book.

Techni'ue0related theory and real eperience are essentially twodifferent things.

The power inherent in this collection of personal

practitioner eperiences is such that e9en if you ne9er intend to

try out the techni'ues described in it< you are practically

guaranteed to ne9ertheless encounter this phenomenon< as it will

enter your subconscious mind as a kind of programming that will

sooner or later acti9ate at the right moment. This collection is all

the more beneficial for those who would like to recei9e realguidance in their eplorations. 6ll of the fundamental mistakes

that practitioners are prone to make are described and analy>ed

222






here. =a9ing read the book< the practitioner will be armed with

knowledge of the most distilled and 9erified kind.

&n preparation for this book< the personal eperiences of

hundreds of practitioners were collected at seminars< through thewebsite< and by mail. =owe9er< only the most demonstrati9e

descriptions were chosen for inclusion. Thus< the selected

descriptions are in9aluable not only for those who ha9e ust

started out on their ourney with the most etraordinary practice

of out0of0body tra9el< but also for those who already ha9e

substantial eperience with it.

& would like to epress my gratitude to all those who

assisted me in putting together this one0of0a0kind compilation.

ou ha9e made a contribution to this field of study and it only

remains for me to wish you further success< which will show that

my commentary on your eperiences was right on.

Michael Raduga

Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel

Table of "ontents?

Part *

Dea9ing the Perception of the %ody

Part II

Out0of0%ody periments

Part III

The periences of ,ell0Hnown 6uthors

Part I7

*emonstrati9e "ase !tudies

Appendi>

22)






This book is free via internet, so feel free to distributeit!

Send it to all your friends!Post it on your sites and blogs!



Date post:	04-Jun-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	rpandit075698
View:	216 times
Download:	0 times

School of Out-Of-Body

Documents